Home

Dimension II 50.04 User`s Manual - Environmental Test Chambers

1. eene 3 5 Recipe Build Screen eese 3 5 Internal X Events cerise eenee cere rr ecu anra eror uere R nuu aUanRds 3 7 Example REGIE 1 3 n e ra CERES URN NE AF Era osonni Neniae 3 8 W IEE NEES 3 8 Convert Graph to a Table seeeeeesseeeeeee 3 8 Setpoint Program Table aneaneeeeeoeooonoonnnneessoerenrrrsennsseesne 3 9 Blank Worksheet cccscccccccesseessesssnneeeeeeeesssessneeeeees 3 10 Enter Data From Table Into Dimension II Program 3 11 14 Run a Recipe ensctesiit ciet deed EE a US 3 15 otart a Recipe eed en ben e ceti aes RU ERU dnd 3 15 Operator Salt oie tois taa eiiis 3 15 Alternate Recipe Starts sssssssssssssesss 3 15 Stop TEE 3 16 Restart at Recipe End nnnnnannnneseeerrerseessrerrrrrsssrrrren 3 16 Stop Macro key ssssessssesrssssseerrnssrrrnserrrnssrrrrssssens 3 16 Remote Switch S iuo ano re at Lat LR ata 3 15 Hold FUNMCUOM roit tar reca Ke REY Fe sens 3 16 Advanced Features 000nnnnnoeeeesooeeooronrrnersrerrrrenerreeeeno 3 18 FRECY CIES heed cbse sence TEENS 3 18 PID GrOUPS EE 3 18 Alarm Groups etu eer ere to EY ERE Tecta recs 3 18 Guaranteed Goak sss 3 18 Editing a begeestert 3 19 View a Recipe nae eoe Ope ee e eios 3 20 Display Proleg rri er trs o ees 3 21 22 Loop Display Screens eeeeeeeee eene eere eene 3 22
2. eene 1 1 CSZ Dimension ll Conventions e 1 3 Terminology iiam e eoa ouo el ted 14 How to Get Help ssssssseeme 1 5 Section 1 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Introducing CSZ Dimension II What is CSZ Dimension II 1 2 A powerful easy to use dual loop process controller from Research Inc CSZ Dimension ll features a wide range of configuration control setpoint program ming monitoring and alarming for your environmental chamber applications The systems described in this manual are designed to provide superior digital PID control in general purpose control applications Standard as well as spe cialized thermocouple RTD and linear inputs can be used to provide complete closed loop control of temperature and other variables An intelligent unit equipped with its own microprocessor the CSZ Dimension ll universal operator interface features a unique backlit display highly visible in the most adverse lighting conditions Large easily readable characters and a wide range of graphic displays give operators the information they need with clarity and precision To move from screen to screen the front panel is equipped with a large diamond shaped four way display select key used to select graphic icons representing a full range of configuration and operation functions For parameter selection and data entry a large multi function knob is ava
3. Network Mode Request and Response Messages Two types of messages are used with network mode protocol request mes sages and response messages The host computer initiates request messages the controller answers with response messages The controller always generates one message in response to a request message from the host computer Both message types require AC K NAK handshaking control characters for proper operation Network Mode Control Characters Special handshaking control characters frame the messages between the computer and Dimension II The five control charac ters used in Dimension II serial communication are STX Start of TeXt used to begin a request or response message ETX End of TeXt used to end a request or response message ENQ ENQuiry to prompt a response message from the controller ACK ACKnowledge to verify proper communication NAK Not AcKnowledge to verify improper communication See table B 3 for the numeric equivalents of these characters Note Control characters may NOT be used in the station address or data field portions of a message B 10 Network Mode Communication Sequence Fig B 7 illustrates the communication sequence for a message between a host computer and Dimension II Each communication begins with the transmission of a request message from the computer to Dimension II which then transmits either an ACK or a NAK control character bac
4. 4 2 Before You Configure gege dee eet 4 3 Moving Around the Configuration Screens 4 3 Moving Up or Down a Row eene 4 5 Moving From Screen to Screen Across a Row 4 5 Configuration Screens Overview eee 4 5 Unit Configuration Screen 4 5 Glossary Configuration Screens soeeieieeeeeeerenereeserenre 4 8 Process Configuration Screens sssssssssseees 4 8 Display Configuration Screens nnossaenenenosiseieoneenseeeereerene 4 8 UO Setup and Calibration Screens o osiseoneeeeereerneeren 4 8 Communication Setup Screens esse 4 8 Making Configuration Selections se 4 9 Unit Configuration Screens esee 4 13 Setting Up Security Access Passcodes 4 13 Defining Macro Keys ccccsscssscssessssssessessessssensancoesseenenss 4 15 Setting System Start Mode o anannaenosenenisisereersrrsresrrsrrere 4 17 Diagnostic and Troubleshooting seeeseeeees 4 17 Option 1 and 2 Information essssenne 4 18 Glossary tag names Configuration 4 19 Unit Glossary Configuration Screen e0sassoeneereeeneeenene 4 19 Programmer Glossary Configuration Screen 4 20 Loop Glossary Configuration Screen 4 21 Input Output Glossary Configuration Screen
5. sssusss 4 13 Setting Up Security Access Passcodes 4 13 Defining Macro Keys 4 15 Setting System Start Mode niereeen 4 17 Diagnostic and Troubleshooting 4 17 Option 1 and 2 Information 4 18 Glossary tag names Configuration 4 19 Unit Glossary Configuration Screen 4 19 Programmer Glossary Configuration Screen 4 20 Loop Glossary Configuration Screen 4 21 Input Output Glossary Configuration Screen 4 21 Process Configuration esses 4 22 Setpoint Programmer Configuration 4 22 Control Loop Contfouration 4 25 Alarm and Logic Configuration 4 29 Output Configuration sesesssssssssss 4 31 Operation Display Configuration Screens 4 33 Overview Display Configuration 4 33 Programmer Display Configuration 4 36 Loop Display Confouraton 4 38 Logic Display Configuration ssss 4 40 Alarm Status Screen Help Message Configuration 4 41 Input Output Configuration and Calibration 4 42 Analog Input Configuration and Calibration 4 42 Analog and Contact Output Calibration 4 46 Saving Unit Configuration Data 4 54 Commu
6. 4 21 Process Configuration 4 22 Setpoint Programmer Configuration 4 22 Control Loop Configuration sse 4 25 Alarm and Logic Configuration eeseessessssss 4 29 Output Confiquralioh pateret ted rn md te atin denen 4 31 Operation Display Configuration Screens 4 33 Overview Display Configuration sseesssesssssss 4 33 Programmer Display Configuration sssuessss 4 36 Loop Display Conftouraton 4 38 Logic Display Configuration snneeaannasnasnasennneiressrrrrsenen 4 40 Alarm Status Screen Help Message Configuration 4 41 Input Output Configuration and Calibration 4 42 Analog Input Configuration and Calibration 4 42 Analog and Contact Output Calibration ssse 4 46 Saving Unit Configuration Data cece eee 4 54 Communications Configuration ssess 4 54 TABLE OF CONTENTS vi CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Section 5 Dianostic and Troubleshooting Diagnostic Testing 222ssssse 5 2 Help Message EEN 5 4 Input Fluctuation Conditions sssseseeeeee 5 5 Error Advice Messages 22ess e 5 6 Troubleshooting Guide sse 5 8 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL Introducing CSZ Dimension II What is CSZ Dimension ll
7. LET response be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed RS 422 Terminal Echo Mode Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the terminal echo mode on off used during RS 422 communications PRINT format PR E04 LET format LE EO4 X where X is echo mode Field length 8 Value See remarks Echo mode on ON Echo mode off OFF PRINT request PR E04 PRINT response DN LET request LE EO4 2 OFF LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed ETT Enecineerino IInitc Purpose Use Remarks Examples B 40 To monitor or select the engineering units of an analog input PRINT format PR EU I where is input LET format LE EV I 2 XXX where is input and XXX is the 3 alphanumeric characters Field length 3 F Fahrenheit C Celsius and XXX Linear Linear engineering units are user configurable PRINT request PR EU 1 PRINT response C TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL EV Event Outputs Purpose Use Remarks Examples FPC Full Passcode Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS LET request LE EV 3 7H LET response To monitor the actual state of the programmed event ou
8. TYP Analog Input Type Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the types of inputs used on an analog I O card PRINT format PR TYP I where is analog input number LET format LE TYP I 7 x where is analog input number x is input type Field length 8 Value See remarks Use the command PR ALL I where is the input number to display a list of all permissible input types Important Input type changes also require wiring and sensor changes PRINT request PR TYP 1 PRINT response Type B LET request LE TYP 1 Type G LET response UT Engineering Units Type TA088002 001 Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the engineering unit type used with an analog input PRINT format PR UT I where is analog input number LET format LE UT I 7 x where is analog input number x is engineering units Field length 8 Value Centigrd Fahrenht Linear Centigrd TC or RTD Fahrenht TC or RTD Linear Linear input PRINT request PR UT 1 PRINT response C entigrd LET request LE UT 1 Fahrenht LET response B 69 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS KZ EE B 70 SG SG SG Example of System Variable Use This section gives an example of getting something done using the system variables via a Dimension II communications port We explain the steps necessary to set up pr
9. The PID system variable sets or views the values for each group whereas the PT system variable sets or views the type of PID control When programmed PID is selected the programmer determines the PID group to be used for each segment in the programmer PRINT request PR PT 1 PRINT response S LET request LE PT 1 D LET response To view the date on which the controller was last powered up PRINT format PR PUD Field length 8 Value MM DD YY Displayed in standard month day year format PRINT request PR PUD PRINT response 08 16 90 To view the time at which the controller was last powered up PRINT format PR PUT Field length 8 Value HH MM SS Displayed in standard hours minutes seconds 24 hour time format PRINT request PR PUT PRINT response 06 21 01 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL PV Process Variable Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To monitor the process variable of a control loop PRINT format PR PV L where L is loop Field length 8 The format for the process variable value matches the range in use PRINT request PR PV 1 PRINT response 25 74 QS2 RS 232 Xon Xoff Mode Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the state of the Xon Xoff mode for RS 232 communications PRINT format PR QS2 LET format LE QS2 2 x where x is the state of the Xon Xoff communications mode
10. ASCIIcharactersare available including uppercase letters lowercase letters numbers special characters punctuation and spaces 6 Usethe knob to select the desired character The character will be entered in the first field and the selector box will highlight the second character field Repeat this procedure until you have entered a character or space in each character position in the label KA075771 001 4 15 Dimension li SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL UNiT CONFIGURATION Fig 4 8 Defining Macro Keys 5126 4 16 Full Boc gg 86 86 Gud Hee 6 4 80 08 Lg Lui FULL Macroky2 L STOP i Select the MacroKey Sus Mode ColdSt to Program Fissiose po dstrt g Select the Function to Activate Deactivate A window opens with a list of functions to attach to the Macro Key ctinatd Betiuatd SE Select the required Asecond window parameters opens to prompt you for the required additional parameter selections 7 Use the knob to select the first function you wish to perform with the macro key 8 Select ACTIVATD The system will display ACTIVATD in this field and permit you to select various program or loop operation parameters 9 Repeatthis process with the other parameters listed on this screen 10 When you are finished making selections for this loop programmer combination you may repeat this procedure for another loop program mer combination 11 Repeat the above procedure to
11. At_ErrNo Displays error number and description when ENTER pressed Accept Select YES to accept auto tuning values for the loop Samples Displays the number of samples taken during the auto tune session PVchange Displays the amount of PV change D change Displays the percentage of PV change since the last sample Auto tune is complete when change is 1 percent PIDGrp 1 Select PID group 1 5 into which calculated values will be entered TuneAct1 Select output action direct reverse RespType1 Select response type Fast medium slow Close Wn Closes window When auto tuning is initiated the control output is BUMPED by a user defined amount The process variable is then monitored to determine how the process reacted to the BUMP Gain Reset and rate calculations are derived from this reaction After auto tune is complete the control output is returned to its original condition and the calculated PID values are displayed Logic Display Screens 3 26 Refer to Figs 3 20 and 3 21 The Dimension Il system can be configured to display in text mode up to four Logic displays The first display shown in Fig 3 20 always displays the current status of events only The remaining three displays are user configurable and can include logic information similar to the samples shown in Fig 3 21 Each screen can display up to 12 lines of informa tion such as the current status of contact inputs relay outputs and even
12. Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Mnemonic This parameter will read either F or C for all thermocouples and RTDs depending on the status of the EngUnits field If a linear input type is selected the three character field mnemonic can be user configurable to reflect the units required e g RPM or PSI etc IMPORTANT NOTE The current Dimension software is NOT a full floating point system All numbers including programmer profiles are stored internally as 16 bit integers A decimal point is added for param eter entry and display It requires as can be seen in the input and output configuration screens a decimal position parameter It effects PVs SPs and Profiles and analog outputs when output is used as a retransmit Note the following 1 Programmer profiles will have the same number of decimal points as the corresponding PV e g PV 1 XXX X Profile 1 XXX X e g Thermocouple 1 dp PV 2 XX XX Profile 2 XX XX e g linear 2 dp PV 3 XXXX Profile 3 XXXX e g linear 0 dp PV 4 X XXX Profile 4 X XXX e g linear 3 dp Example If we enter the PROG build screen under Programmer 1 we can enter a setpoint profile value of 50 0 degrees If we move to PROG build screen under Programmer 2 and look at the Profile value we just entered under Programmer 1 we will see 5 00 This occurs because the profile value always assumes the same number of decimal
13. LogicScr Logic Display Screen IEN Use To select a Logic screen for configuration Selection DCON LOG screen LOGIC__1 to LOGIC__4 Remarks This entry selects which Logic screen will be configured for display Selection may be limited by the number of logic screens set see NumLgscr Display configuration information can be stored on the memory card in the file type DspConf Loop Alm Loop Alarm lt E E Use To select a loop to enter alarm limits Selections ALM SET or CONF ALM screen LoopNm01 to LoopNm08 Remarks On the CONF ALM screen the hysteresis and latch state are entered for the selected loop On the ALM SET screen the alarm group is selected first and then the PV and DEVIATION alarm limits can be set for the selected loop and group Hysteresis and latching selections are valid for both Hi and Lo alarms Loop Num EE ABE E To select a loop number Selections GLOS_SYS or CONF_LOP screen LOOP or LOOP_Num LoopNm01 to LoopNm08 Remarks On the CONF_LOP screen this entry selects the loop for configuration On the GLOS_LOP screen this entry selects which loop s tagnames will be edited Loop Scr Loop Display Screen 23 Use To select a loop screen for display configuration Selections DCON LOP screen Loop screentagnames LOOP 1toLOOP 8 Remarks Selects Loop screen for display configuration The entry Format will be updated to show the present display configuration of the selected Loop screen
14. To view or change the day of the week on which a specific programmer is to start PRINT format PR DOW P where P is programmer number LET format LE DOW P X where P is programmer number X is day of week Field length 8 Value See remarks Enter days as follows Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednsday Thursday Friday Saturday PRINT request PR DOW 1 PRINT response Sunday LET request LE DOW 1 Monday LET response To monitor or set the date PRINT format PR DT LET format LE DT MM DD YY Field length 8 Value MM DD YY MM month DD day YY year PRINT request PR DT 93 PRINT response 12 03 89 LET request LE DT 12 15 93 LET response To monitor the deviation PRINT format PR DV L where L is loop Field length 8 Value Depends on the range in use The format for the deviation value matches the range in use PRINT request PR DV 1 PRINT response 21 3 EO2 RS 232 Terminal Echo Mode Purpose TA088002 001 To view or change the terminal echo mode on off used during B 39 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Use Remarks Examples Note Dimension II must RS 232 communications PRINT format PR EO2 LET format LE EO2 X where X is echo mode Field length 8 Value See remarks Echo mode on ON Echo mode off OFF PRINT request PR EO2 PRINT response ON LET request LE E02 OFF
15. 022 3 11 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION 3 Enter 022 segment of recipe from data in third column of table Segment 022 Temp 85 0 Humidity 65 0 JL Time 00 03 00 3 min X Evnts de __ PID Groub 1 Next Seg 023 Dep Profle DISPLAY CLOSE Segment 023 Temp 85 0 Humidity 65 0 Time 00 09 00 9 min X Evnts de __ Next_Seg 024 3 12 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION 5 Enter 024 segment of recipe from data in fifth column of table Segment 024 Temp 85 0 Humidity 90 0 Time 00 04 00 4 min X Evnts de Next_Seg 025 Segment 025 Temp 85 0 Humidity 90 0 Time 00 03 00 3 min EVENT de BE Dep Proflect ISPLAY osen CLOSE 3 13 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Enter 026 segment of recipe from data in seventh column of table Gel ug papire Segment 026 SCENE eiser Temp 25 0 Humidity 50 0 EES iind Time 00 01 00 1min EVENT ____________ X Evnts de Next_Seg 027 PID Group 1 Den Prarie DISPLAY __C LOSE 8 Enter 027 segment of recipe from data in eighth column of table Segment 027 Temp 25 0 Humidity 50 00 Time 00 01 00 1 min X Evnts de Next_Seg 027 3 14 CSZ Dimension User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Run a Recipe Start a Recipe Described below are the possible methods of starting a recipe They are as
16. A follows j Operator Start x 7 Press the diamond key UP or DOWN until the Program icon is displayed The system will display a Program Run screen Fig 3 10 From the Program Run screen select Start and a window will open see Fig 3 11 The operator can select any particular Recipe and by moving the cursor to start and pressing enter the start selection will initiate a Recipe Start Close the start window and you will view the current programmer status Fig 3 10 Fig 3 11 Program Run Screen Program Start Window PROGRIUNHI O 12 49 84 FR GFE LR 16E 12 14 47 Poahodebl Vu 1 Fehiodaeni Holdoreer Ju StetPari Start S5Se 1 Program Kectipe 1 Et art Prar Cloee pn epetion o Enter PerBu ild Build CSTARTI STOF Alternate Recipe Starts 1 Macro Keys configured to start a Recipe from the Display mounted push button See Macro Key Configuration for more information Once a Recipe is started the Program mode changes to Run indicating the clock or time base is counting The programmer will continue to display Run and count down time until the Recipe ends The display will change to PgEnd 3 15 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Stop a Recipe The user may need to stop or end the current Recipe while the PgMode Run The following choices are available 1 Restart the Recipe at the End Segment If for example Recipe 1 uses Segments 1 10 with Segment 10 as the ending segment
17. Ki A me 1 5 segment 022 etc hea Not needed for this example PID Group See advanced features Next Segment E E E pe ES ES EX Wa E Kl ES SS ax ES E o N Fig 3 9 Table explanation i TE d fi i o N i N V Q N ai 25 0 25 0 85 0 85 0 850 850 250 25 0 DM nm 65 0 65 0 65 0 65 0 90 0 3 50 0 00 04 00 00 03 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 71 7 8 mn Q N Oo o N N Program End is achieved when Next Segment is entered same as the current segment CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION SETPOINT PROGRAM WORKSHEET Start Segment Segment 0 179 Profile Stepoint 0 255 Recycles Alarm Group 1 5 PID Group 1 5 a LLL EHE Lu ALLE EE EN CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Entering Data From Table into Dimension II Program Use knob to select items for beginning segment 1 Enter 020 segment of recipe from data in first column of table RECIPE 2 Segment 020 Segment 020 Temp 30 0 Humidity 65 0 Time 00 000 00 zero time EVENT X Evnts de _ _ Next_Seg 021 2 Enter 021 segment of recipe from data in second column of table Segment 021 Temp 30 0 Humidity 65 0 Time 00 01 00 1 min X Evnts de Next_Seg
18. Macro Name 2 RW T BND CLC Basic Number of Decimals RW MI Memory Image R W BNV_ CLC Basic Numeric Variable R W MR Manual Reset R W L BSV CLC Basic String Variable RW NA2 RS 232 Network Address RW CAG Current Alarm Group RL NA4 RS 422 Network Address RW CC ReCycle Counter R P NAI Number of Analog Inputs R CCY Contact Output Time Propor NAO Numter of Analog Outputs R tioning Cycle Time R W C NCI Number of Contact Inputs R CD Calculated Rate RI NCO Number of Contact Outputs R CEV Current Events R P NL Number of Loops R CI Configuration Image R W NM2 RS 232 Protocol RW CIN Contact In RC NMA RS 422 Protocol RW CJ Cold Junction Temperature RI NP Number of Programmers R CJE Cold Junction Error RW I NS Number of Segments R P CM Cascade Multiplier R W L NTP Number of Time Proportioning R CO Contact Out RC Outputs CP Calculated Gain RL OA Output Action R W L CPG Current PID Group RL OC Output Change R W L CRS Calculated Reset RL OLS Analog Output Linear Span R W O CS Current Segment Number RP OLZ Analog Output Linear Zero R W O CSP Current Span Reference RW OT Output R W L CZE Current Input Zero RW OV Overview Screen Titles R W T S DF Digital Filter RW P1 Programmer Profile 1 value R W P DH Direct Output High Limit R W L P2 Programmer Profile 2 value R W P DL Direct Output Low Limit R W L p3 Programmer Profile 3 value RW P DO Direct Output in percent RW L P4 Programmer Profile 4 value R W P DOW Day of Week
19. See also RS 232 and RTS Cycle Time The time period that a time proportioned output divides into on time and off time i e the time period during which there is a controller output for a per centage of the total time and no controller output during the remaining time For example a 30 output with a 10 second CYCLE TIME consists of three seconds of on time and seven seconds of off time for successive 10 second periods See also TIME PROPORTIONING Cycles A programmer function used to repeat a series of segments a defined number of times KA075771 001 E 5 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY D Dead Band One of three types of bi modal output relationships When DEAD BAND is selected only one type of output action reverse or direct can be active at a given time However DEAD BAND differs from an ADJOINING BAND in that the output does not change immediately between reverse and direct Instead a dead band exists on the transition between reverse and direct control during which both outputs remain at the minimum output value The actuating signal to the output circuit must reach a specific level which deter mines the size of the DEAD BAND before either output can be activated For the Dimension II a DEAD BAND exists only during automatic control Manual control with DEAD BAND is identical to manual control with ADJOIN ING BAND Use of DEAD BAND ensures that transitions between rev
20. The X off character is usually Control S press the Control key and while holding down the Control key also press S Under most circumstances a terminal does not need a software driver because most terminals have built in X on off communications Control S and Control Q are the only two control characters that are needed once the terminal is connected to the controller Fig B 5 illustrates the communication sequence for a message exchanged using X on off communications Software Drivers Most host computers have terminal drivers that support X on off If not the Network Mode topic on page B 9 contains the information needed to write a software driver using the network mode TA088002 001 B 5 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Fig B 3 Terminal Mode X on off Communications Sequences B 6 PRINT SP 1 SP 2 SP 3 SP 4 cr Dimension 111 1 5222 2 Terminal X OFF a e Idle Computer processes data X ON processes RO 3 RO 4 RO S cr Remainder of message 55 5 cr A A 1 space cr carriage return Error Checking Terminal mode does not use error checking The terminal or computer as sumes that data is valid even if an error occurs during transmission Error codes however are generated by Dimension II for items such as syntax errors and number errors See Error Messages in this appendix TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES
21. Use Displays the zero minimum value of an output Selection ANA OUTS screen Numeric Remarks See calibration instructions for setup information Zoom Profile Zoom Use Zoom factor on Profile displays Selection DCON PRG screen 1 to 3600 Remarks The zoom factor alters the time base for the profile display It can be thought of as the number of seconds per pixel on the display For example if the segment time equals 10 minutes 600 seconds then with a zoom factor of 60 the seg ment would have a horizontal length of 10 pixels or 60 seconds per pixel zoom factor 60 KA075771 001 A 35 DIMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY A 36 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Serial Communications TA088002 001 Communications Overview 122 B 2 Electrical Connections B 3 155 232 EE B 3 Shield COPINIOOUDULO dimitti rtu nnn B 4 KEEN E B 5 Software DTE aoc retient evan vods uidit eed tentia Quas B 5 Ert r Checking T B 6 Setting up the Terminal Mode oerte torte B 7 Terminal Mode Data Access tenens B 8 Network Mode csccosnciscdsinvucasdanidestnnrlesoinciadsivdvstuantetsren B 8 Software Driver seri ri ume nex ter A NR B 9 Setting Up the Network Mode csccciascssssenpestscssconess B 9 Network Mode Request and Response Messages B 10 Network Mode Request and Response B 11 Message Formats vis
22. s MANUAL GLOSSARY Engineering Units The actual units of measurement Common engineering units are degrees Fahrenheit degrees Centigrade pounds per square inch minutes etc Event A programmer output that is either ON or OFF During program RUN each programmer EVENT is set either ON or OFF at the beginning of each segment based on that EVENT s programmer value ON or OFF for that segment Feedback 1 A signal or connection used by a circuit device or system to monitor its own output A feedback signal is often used to identify and correct errors automatically 2 Synonymous with the term process variable See also CLOSED LOOP and AUTOMATIC CONTROL Filter A circuit device or software algorithm that removes or reduces an undesired component e g noise in a signal The FILTER averages the process variable input signal to minimize the effects of noise and short term process variations Final Control Element Provides the force to do the work of the control loop A device that acts di rectly on a process to affect the process variable Typical final control elements are valves electric power controllers SCR thyristors heating units and cool ing units See also PROCESS VARIABLE Format Format places the data structure on the Dimension II Memory Card and sets the density of the data The structure of the card is referred to as blocks of data Full Access One of three possible operating stat
23. 1 volt in and 400 degrees 5 volts in Lin Zero 100 0 Lin_Span 900 00 Lin_DecP 1 InptLowLim 0 0 InptHiLim 400 00 Setpoint entries limited to 0 0 to 400 00 L E r 7 Example 3 Negative slopes ARE allowed 0 to 10 volts represents 1000 to 0 rpm respectively Lin_Zero 1000 Lin_Span 0 Lin_DecP 0 InptLowLim 0 Will automatically default when Span Zero Dp are changed InptHiLim 1000 If the user wishes to limit his setpoints to 100 rpm 9 volts in and 900 rpm 1 volt in Lin Zero 1000 Lin Span 0 Lin_DecP 0 InptLowLim 100 InptHiLim 2900 Setpoint entries limited to 100 to 900 rpm L 4 KA075771 001 4 47 Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Analog and Contact Output Calibration 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Analog Output Setup screen shown in Fig 4 27 2 Rotate the knob to select the ANAOUTPT field 3 Press the knob to highlight rotate knob to select the tag name of the analog output you wish to configure Fig 4 27 Analog Output Calibration and Configuration R5C2 Analog Output Configuration Eancc 66 CuclTime 88 ime J SE anm UU MI Analog Output Config uration elections ra erate tea mno d Zeen d m S A Close HR E ES alibratio D elections za Analog Output 4 48 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION 4 The system will display the currently active parameters and characteristics f
24. CPU Software Revision Level Use To display the software revision level Selections UNIT CNF screen Diagnost CC Diag Remarks None CurSeg Current Segment Number Use To display the currently active segment of the setpoint programmer Selection PROGRUN screen None Remarks None CycCnt Cycle Counter B es La Use To display the number programmer recycles that are remaining Selection PROGRUN screen 0 255 Remarks Maximum of eight segments may be configured with recycles If more than eight segments with recycles are entered controller will go to program end Cycle Backlighting Cycle Use To enable backlighting cycling Selections Backlite Set time on time off Remarks See Backlite and Set CyclTime Time Proportioning Cycle Time Use To select the time proportioning cycle time for an output Selections ANA OUTS TP OUTS or CON OUTS screen 0 to 255 seconds A 10 KA075771 001 DIMENSION ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks A setting of 0 disables time proportioning When analog outputs are selected for time proportioning action jumpers on the analog UO module must be changed See calibration instructions for more information Date Calendar Date Use To display and set Date Selections UNIT screen Month Day Year MM DD YY Remarks Enter current calendar date Dec_Pos Decimal Point Position 74 Use To select a decimal position for hi a
25. Configuration screens both the original default names and new names are displayed Process Configuration Screens Process Configuration screens are used to configure and modify Dimension II system control strategy including loops setpoint programmers alarms logic and I O patching Display Configuration Screens Display Configuration screens are used to select the format and configure the content of Dimension II Operation displays A variety of selections permit you to choose what information is displayed and how it is displayed UO Setup and Calibration Screens These are used to set up and calibrate the inputs and outputs connected to Dimension II I O modules Functions performed on these screens include UO type selection zero span adjustment engineering units selection decimal and mnemonic selection cycle time and high and low limits selection Dedicated screens are provided for specific input and output types analog time propor tioned contact Communication Setup Screens These screens are used to configure RS 232 RS 422 or IEEE 488 communica tions If multiple Dimension Il systems are connected on a network to a super visory PC this screen is also used to assign a network address to the control cage See Appendix B for communications information KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Making Configuration Selections KA075771 001 Making configuration selections i
26. Display one number at a time by turning the knob CW or CCW and press ENTER when the number you wish to select is displayed This input method displays numbers in the correct format as the knob is turned Parameters such as time date and passcodes are set with limits as are control parameters and variables Note Ifa number is entered outside of a field s designated range the number will not be accepted The previous value will be redisplayed in the data entry field Length varies from field to field PARAMETER SELECTION As the knob is turned CW or CCW a list of selectable items is displayed for example Loopo1 LooPo2 Loopo3 When the correct entry is displayed press ENTER to select the item FUNCTION SELECTION Some entries are functions that will be ex ecuted when ENTER is pressed For example scrolling to the cose entry in a window and pressing ENTER closes the window Note lf an item is selectable selector box can be moved to it the help key can be pressed and a help message for the item in the selector box will be displayed If an item is se lected by pressing ENTER a screen change cannot be made until the selector box reappears CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE CSZ Default Screen The CSZ screen Fig 2 4 is the first screen displayed when the Dimension II is powered up The following information and functions are available at this screen AIR TEMP Displays a
27. DspConf_ Dimension Display Configuration Overview display screens DCON_OVR Programmer display screens DCON PRG Loop display screens DCON LOP Logic display screens DCON LOG MacroKy Macro Key Configuration Macro key number 1 function configuration MacroKy1 excluding tag name Macro key number 2 function configuration MacroKy2 excluding tag name Loop display screens DCON LOP Logic display screens DCON LOG Basic CLC option support To be determined by engineering Recipes Recipes The programmer build PgBuild segment table of 256 segments Loop PID parameters for PID groups 1 5 Gain Reset Rate Loop Alarm settings for Alarm Groups 1 5 Loop Alm HiHiPV LoLoPV HiPV LoPV HiHiDV LoLoDV HiDev LoDev Recipe Tag Names ProgName for the programmer glossary Starting Segment numbers Start Seg associates with the eight pro gram recipe tag names default names Recipe 1 to Recipe 8 Items Not Stored on Card Time of Day Date Contrast Backlite UNIT CNF glossary name parameter Mnemonic linear range characters for process variable units EngUnits Centigrade Fahrenheit Linear The engineering units are not changed by memory card functions unless the Input type param eter selected in the Dimension is different than stored on the memory card When the memory card restores the Input type to a Thermo couple or RTD the EngUnits are set to Centigrade When the memo
28. For T Cs and RTDs this is the full usable range of the sensor Changing this parameter limits the low zero value that can be entered as a setpoint This parameter is used by the PID control algorithm together with the InptHiLim parameter to estab lish the range of the input to be controlled See examples of pos sible setting on page 4 42 InptHiLim This parameter defaults to the higher limit of the input type selected For T Cs and RTDs this is the full usable range of the sensor Changing this parameter limits the high span value that can be entered as a setpoint This parameter is used by the PID control algorithm together with the InptLowLim parameter to establish the range of the input to be controlled See examples of possible settings on page 4 42 EngUnits When an RTD or thermocouple is selected under the InptType field this parameter allows a selection between F and C If a linear input type has been selected this will always show Linear and cannot be changed DecPoint Displays the number of positions to the left of the decimal point When a linear range is selected i e 0 10 0 5 0 20 4 20 the decimal point defaults to 2 and can be changed under the Configur window When a thermocouple or RTD range is selected the decimal point normally defaults to 1 except for thermocouples B G and D these default to O The decimal position can NOT be changed for RTDs or T Cs 4 45 Unit CONFIGURATION 4 46
29. INSERT MEMORY CARD or UNFORMATTED MEMORY CARD If a card is not installed INSERT MEMCRD is displayed If an in stalled card has to been initialized and is unreadable UNFORMAT MEMCARD will be displayed The function FUNC selection field permits you to scroll through and select from a list of functions including READ WRITE DIRECT ory FORMAT and DELETE Fig 2 29 Memory Card Operation Window Select the Memory Card Function ODs B6 Bw l 7 Insert Memcrd FUNC READ _ FILE Recipes A window opens to Close_Wn_CLOSE allow access to the Memory Card Read Write Directory Format and Delete Functions When you select the DIRECT ory function a window permits you to scroll through the directory of files on the card The name date and size Kbytes of each file are displayed 2 32 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE If READ or WRITE is selected and a RAM card is installed the selector box moves to the FILE field where the file to be written or read can be specified A status line displays card status parameters including write protect on off battery low good read write fail and file too large 4 f necessary format the installed memory card 5 To write a file to a card select the FUNC field Select the WRITE function The selector box will move to the FILE field Select or enter the name of the file that is to be written to the card If additional informa
30. Indicates the status of the output that controls the cooling solenoid RH Mode CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Digital Out Screen Cont d HUMIDIFY Indicates the status of the output that controls the humidity solenoid DE HUMD Indicates the status of the output that controls the de humidify wet coil solenoid MAX HEAT Indicates whether the controller is calling for maximum heat used only with a dual stage heating system HORN Indicates the status of the sonalert audible alarm output Fig 2 13 Fig 2 11 Fig 2 12 Timing Screen Analog Output Screen Digital Output Screen Timing Screen MAX HEAT Selects the heating output value to cycle on max heat When set to ox the max and min cycle together Fig 2 13 COND HRS Indicates the total number of hours the air circulators conditioning system have been running on the chamber This valve cannot be reset in the field and is permanently stored in non volatile memory 2 15 UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Input Screens Fig 2 14 Analog Input Screen 2 16 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Analog In Screen There are also two different types of inputs being displayed on the input screens Those screens are informational only and give the operator or serviceman indication as to what is being input into the controller The Analog Screen displays the values of the six analog inputs wired into the analog base unit Fig 2
31. The following information is provided in this window Segments The number of profile segments Math Funcs Math functions Logic Logic Remote Cl The number of remote contact inputs Remote CO The number of remote contact outputs e Additionally the Dimension Il serial number and any special CLC programs furnished by Research Inc is displayed If any items you purchased are missing or you require additional items contact your local sales representative or Research Inc at 612 829 8317 Glossary tag names Configuration KA075771 001 Dimension ll uses a wide range of terminology to describe screen types pro gram parameters loop parameters and inputs outputs For example each Operation screen in the system is labeled with a unique tag name on the top row of the screen Also tag names for specific inputs and outputs are used on many screens throughout the system These tag names and labels are stored in system glossaries Glossary Configuration screens are used to modify 8 character parameter tag names and screen titles Whenever a tag name or screen title is changed the change is reflected anywhere the tag name or title is used on the operation screens On Glossary Configuration screens both the original default names and new names are displayed Unit Glossary Configuration Screen Refer to Fig 4 11 The Unit Glossary Configuration screen is used to change the screen titles of all Op
32. To view or change the baud rate used for RS 422 communications PRINT format PR BD4 LET format LE BD4 X where X is baud rate Field length 8 Value 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Terminal and controller must have matching baud rate PRINT request PR BD4 PRINT response 48007 LET request LE BD4 9600 LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications BEU CLC Basic Engineering Units Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the engineering units used with numeric CLC variables PRINT format PR BEU V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BEU V XXX where V is variable number and XXX is a three character string Field length 3 B EU V is used as the units for BNV V BHL V and BLL V V can be any number from 1 to 32 PRINT request PR BEU 1 PRINT response F LET request LE BEU 23 C LET response TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL BF Blend Factor Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To view or change the blend factor value used with cascade control functions PRINT format PR BF L where L is loop number LET format LE BF L X where X is the blend factor Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X 732767 to 32767 Blend factor is used as follows percent output r
33. X Y Graph Loop Display Screen nnnsooooooooeeeeeeeeseeeenne 3 22 Bar Graph Loop Display Screen no00000eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ennenen 3 23 Numeric Character Loop Display s nsessseeseeeseseeeeererereeeree 3 23 Loop Control sonat ete bet endete ute dut debidas 3 24 Loop AUtO TUNING zs hereesia E e iaa 3 25 26 Logic Display Screens sesseeeeenne 3 26 27 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Section 3 Programmer Operation Programmer Status Screen From the Program Run screen shown in Fig 3 1 you access operating functions for the CSZ Dimension ll programmer Described below is how to read the status screen Fig 3 1 Program Run Screen Current Recipe is in the Run mode 45 seconds are left in the Segment 1 minute 45 seconds remain in the Recipe Cent p Olm Dppl Current Setpoint is 25 9 PID Grbi Current Segment is 2 3 2 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL Fig 3 2 Program Status Display PROGRAMMER OPERATION Programmer Terminology Press the diamond key UP or DOWN until the Program icon is displayed The system will display a Program Run screen Fig 3 1 The Program Run screen is used to select start hold run or modify a program Program Run screen functions are as follows StrtPgr1 T_Seg01 T_Left01 PgSpt01 CurSeg01 CycCnt01 Alm_Grp1 Program start for programmer 01 Opens a window to select a program t
34. screen LpMode RemSPsrc 0 00 off to 200 00 The rate factor is used to anticipate and correct for the process lag and adjust the output to avoid over shoot The feect of Rate on the control loop output can be calculated by the following formula Output 96 Rate x PV Current PV Last Minutes between PV current and PV Last Ratio Cascade Ratio Factor Use Selection Remarks To apply a multiplier to the cascade setpoint CONF_LOP screen Numeric This parameter is only used if cascade control is selected see RemSPsrc The Cascade multiplier applies a multiplication factor to the output of the primary control loop before it is used as a setpoint by the secondary control loop The formula used is Primary control loop output Ratio Primary control loop setpoint Blend _ Scale_ Secondary control loop setpoint READ Read from Memory Card Function Use Selections Remarks To initiate reading a file from a memory card UNIT screen Mem_Card FUNC See FUNC Recipes Memory Card Recipe File Type Use Selections Remarks KAQ075771 001 To read write or delete recipe file types UNIT screen Mem Card FUNC SeeFILE A 27 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Recycles Recycles Use To set the number of times a portion of the program will be repeated Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 0 255 Remarks An entry of 0 indicates n
35. the cascade parameters should be set to allow the proper ranging of the output Refer to RemSpsrc section page 4 14 for accessing the cascade parameters Macroky Memory Card Macro Keys File Type Use Selection Remarks To read write or delete a macro key file type UNIT screen Mem Card SeeFILE Macroky Macro Key Definitions KA075771 001 Use Selection Remarks To program the Macro Keys UNIT_CNF screen opens a window The functions that are activated on the Macroky window will be executed in the order that they are listed on the window For example if LpMode and Abort are activated then when the associated Macroky is executed the LpMode command will be executed then the Abort command A 19 Dimension Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY ManReset Manual Reset Use To set the control loop manual reset value Selections LOOP 3 screen LpMode 100 00 to 100 00 Remarks Manual reset is summed to the control loop output When used the manual reset value is usually the same as the control loop output 96 in a steady state condition Mem Card Memory Card Functions Use To execute a memory card function Selection UNIT screen opens a window Remarks See FUNC and FILE glossary descriptions Mem Img Memory Card Memory Image File Type Use To read write or delete a memory image file type Selections UNIT screen Mem Card FILE Remarks SeeFILE
36. 0 HO 9 D o f Q 0 LSS LALO Les DMCTCOLOMOD 35353555343535 CSTART CSTOPI UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE CSZ Dimension l User s MANUAL RI Operation Icons and Screen Display Groups Fig 2 25 Operation Graphic Icon Titles and Screen Display Groups 2 26 The CSZ Dimension II universal operator interface screen displays on the side are divided into two areas Configuration screens and Operation screens Each area is further divided into six functional groups represented by graphic icons Fig 2 25 UNIT OPERATION OVERVIEWDISPLAYS PROGRAM DISPLAYS LOOP DISPLAYS J H LOGIC MONITOR DISPLAYS ALARM DISPLAYS The first icon in each of the two major areas represents the Unit screen de picted as the Research Inc logo A switch can be made between the two icon groups under the following conditions e Select the unit icon using the diamond key The FULL pass code must be entered on the Unit Operation screen in order to access the Unit Configuration screen Pressing the diamond key right will switch from the Unit screen to the unit configuration when FULL access is active As shown in Fig 2 26 CSZ Dimension II Operation screens are divided into six groups with each group identified on screen by a graphic icon Unit Operation Screen Overview Displays Program Displays Loop Displays Logic Monitor Displays Alarm Displays The following sections describe and illustrate CSZ Dimen
37. 25 30 44 5 100 0 0 0 0 00 10 00 LET response To view or change the mode in which the controller will restart after the next power down PRINT format PR SMD LET format LE SMD x where x is mode Field length 8 Value WarmStrt ColdStrt WarmStrt All current settings saved ColdStrt Calibration settings saved all others reset to factory defaults For the LET command W and C may be used PRINT request PR SMD PRINT response C oldStrt LET request LE SMD Warmstrt LET response TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SP Setpoint SPS Setpoint Source Purpose Use Remarks Examples Purpose Use Remarks Examples SR Sampling Rate TA088002 001 Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To monitor or change the setpoint PRINT format PR SP L where L is loop LET format LE SP L XXX where L is loop Field length 8 Value Depends on the range in use The format for the setpoint SP value matches the range in use The setpoint may be changed only when the setpoint source SPS is set to Operator PRINT request PR SP 1 PRINT response 54 0 LET request LE SP 1 87 LET response To view or change the setpoint source for a loop PRINT format PR SPS L where L is loop LET format LE SPS L X where L is loop X is O R or P Field length 8 Value Operator Remote Programr Thi
38. 255 OO JO Oo P oO Pg1Spt01 Programmer 01 setpoint for loop 1 temp Enter recipe profile setpoint value the setpoint the programmer will try to reach in the displayed segment A window appears to enter setpoints for Spt01 Temp and Spt02 Humidity Seg_Time Enter segment time up to 99 hours This is the time to ramp to the entered setpoint or soak at the entered setpoint Evnts Select the desired events to turn on at the start of the segment and to be on the segment duration time events 1 9 a c Recycles Specify 000 to 255 repeat cycles Note When recycles are programmed in and the cycle counter decreases to zero the program advances to the next numeric segment quence the segments of the recipe end a Recipe and Recycle back to the desired segment Note When the next segment number is the same as the current segment number a recipe end is indicated ALARM GROUP Select alarm group 1 5 Activate specific alarms groups at specific times in the cycle to maintain close tolerance used for Guaranteed Soak PID GROUP Not Active for a bi modal control such as used on an environmental chamber DISPLAY Call up graphic recipe profile build window Next _Seg Specify 000 to 255 for the number of the next segment used to se CSZ Dimension If User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Internal X Events This window is displayed when the cursor is moved to the Evnts paramet
39. 5 for Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Fig 4 9 Selecting WarmStart or ColdStart UNIT CHF Fi CC Hec 8 8 Lo oss DR Chn9 Cut FU Macro amp r c TS Nactotaz 5 3 34 FI m me op Geen E F Sus Mode Diassnoz n F Up ie 1 Enter Up zr 2 Enter CSTARTI STOF KA075771 001 4 17 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL UNir CONFIGURATION Option 1 and 2 Information The following procedure lists the features functions and capabilities of the Dimension II model you purchased compared to the maximum configuration available to purchase 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Unit Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 7 2 Use the knob to select the OPTION1 field The Option 1 window will be displayed as shown in Fig 4 10 The following information is provided in this window Loops The number of loops Programmr The number of programmers Ana Ins The number of analog inputs Ana Outs The number of analog outputs Local CI The number of local contact inputs Local CO The number of local contact outputs 422 RS 422 communications 232 RS 232 communications 488 IEEE 488 communications CLC Custom Logic and Control Fig 4 10 Option Information Ort zz 1 E Opt zz 2 E Serial Numbe 12345 12 CLE Program 4 18 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION 3 Repeat step 2 to select the OPTION2 field
40. 8700 User s MANUAL Fig B 4 Communications Configuration Screen TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Setting Up the Terminal Mode Set up Dimension II terminal mode as follows 1 With the unit in the FULL access mode use the diamond key to access the Communications Configuration screen shown in Fig B 6 Use the diamond key to select the 232 Port Configuration screen for RS 232 communications or 422 Port Configuration screen for RS 422 communications CSTARTI STOF Use the knob to select the PROTOCOL field Select TERMINAL mode no error checking Ignore the network address setting network mode only but set all other variables on the Communications Configuration screen to match the configuration of the terminal or host computer Important When the echo mode is enabled all characters sent to the controller except X on off are immediately sent back to the terminal or computer When using terminal mode select the echo mode for terminals but not for computers Hardware handshake is not supported with Dimension II Set this pa rameter to DISABLE With the controller set for WARMSTRT remove AC power from Dimension II Check that the host computer or terminal is powered up and electrically connected to the controller Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS 9 Apply AC power to the controller The controller performs its startup ro
41. 99 in each field before they can gain full or partial access to the system With no passcodes configured FULL status all users may access all system functions After system power up and moving to the Unit Operation screen the currently active access level is displayed in the ACCESS field If LIMITED or NONE is displayed a user must enter at least one passcode in a window that appears when the ACCESS field is selected If the correct passcode is entered the desired access level is granted Security access passcodes are set up as follows 1 With the unit in the default FULL access mode use the diamond key to access the Unit Configuration icon The system will display the Unit Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 7 2 Use the knob to select the FULL ACC field Default FULL full access granted 3 Selectthe three 2 digit codes 4 Move the selector box to the LMTD ACC field and enter codes in the same manner KA075771 001 DiMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION 5 Move the selector box to the CHNG_LVL field Select the access level you wish to activate FULL LIMITED or NONE The access level you selected will be displayed in the CHNG_LVL field and the access codes you entered will be blanked out 6 Use the diamond key to access the Unit Operation screen The access level you selected will be displayed in the ACCESS field 7 To gain FULL or LIMITED access select the ACCESS field and e
42. Dimension Time Proportion output terminal It assumes that the rest of the loop configuration is completed as described in other setup guides and sections 2 8 of the Dimension Operator s Manual Before continuing all hardware configuration jumpers must be set correctly Time proportioned outputs provide on off control The amount of time an output is ON or OFF is determined by the reverse or direct Output Percentage for the control loop and the configured Cycle Time Refer to Figure 1 for a diagram of this relationship The Dimension Controller has outputs available on the Analog card and the Contact card that can be selected for time proportioning Refer to Table 1 for output selec tions options Where an appears in the text it repre sents a number such as loop number card number or input number Analog Card Qty 4 0 5 VDC 4 20 mA Contact VO Card Qty 8 12 280 VAC 3 60 VDC Contact AnigCrd Qty 3 A C Relay Outputs TP_Crd1 Table 1 Time Proportioned Output Relationship Step 1 Access the unit configuration side of the controller This is accomplished by pressing the diamond key up until the RI icon a is highlighted then press left once to ac cess the Unit Configuration display UNIT CNF pictured in Figure 2 Step 2 Access the Output Configuration screen CONF OUT by pressing the diamond key down twice until the Process Configuration icon is highlighted Press right three times until the CONF O
43. Field length 8 Value Enable Disable Xon Xoff enabled Enable Xon Xoff disabled Disable PRINT request PR QS2 PRINT response Disable LET request LE QS2 Enable LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed QS4 RS 422 Xon Xoff Mode Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the state of the Xon Xoff mode for RS 422 communications PRINT format PR QS4 LET format LE QS4 x where x is the state of the XON XOFF communica tions mode Field length 8 Value Enable Disable Xon Xoff enabled Enable Xon Xoff disabled Disable PRINT request PR QS4 PRINT response Disable LET request LE QS4 Enable LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed TA088002 001 B 59 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS RH Reverse Output High Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples RI Recipe Image Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or change the reverse output high limit RH This feature allows the user to set the maximum output percentage for reverse outputs PRINT format PR RH L where L is loop LET format LE RH L XXX X where L is loop and X is the limit Field length 8 Value XXX X
44. Fig 2 35 Mixed numeric text Overview displays can be user config ured to display numeric values and text in three possible modes 3X Mode Displays three user selectable variables as numeric characters three times larger than normal text Also displays tag names engineering units and up to four lines of user selectable text If the selector box can be moved into a text field the variable can be selected and manipulated Fig 2 35 Mixed Numeric Text Overview Display 3X 2X Mode Displays up to eight user selectable variables as numeric charac ters two times larger than normal text Fig 2 36 Displays tag names at normal height All fields view only Fig 2 36 Mixed Numeric Text Overview Display 2X LPHODEOL PROCYROL SETPATOL OUTPUT i DEM oi DIR oi RESET oi RHTE 1 CSTARTI LSTOP 2 38 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE 1X Mode Displays up to 12 lines of user selectable variables in normal text mode If the selector box can be moved into a text field the variable can be selected and manipulated Fig 2 37 Fig 2 37 Mixed Numeric Text Overview Display 1X STOP 2 39 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL Section 3 Programmer Operation Programmer Status Screen cccccccseseseccccsssesesecccsssecesesscecsneens 3 2 Programmer Terminologie 3 3 Program OPNS uice ple cato i birds oc a cried os 34 Building a Setpoint Program
45. INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY ALARM Alarm Screen Titles Use To select the Alarm screen titles for change Selections GLOS YS screen NONE LIMITED or FULL opens a window Remarks Enter any desired ascii string for screen title Some selections may appear for which no screen exists these selections can be ignored Screen titles are consid ered tagnames and are saved on the memory cartridge in the Mem Img file AlarmAct Alarm Action Use To set the output value that the control loop will default to if a thermocouple input opens Selections CONF LOP screen Output Percentage Remarks The default value will be used for the control loop output if a thermocouple input opens sensor break A default value of 0 is most common Factory default is 0 Alarms Alarm Status Use To display alarm status Selections LOOP_ALM screen Alarm acknowledged by selecting Alarms and press ing knob Remarks An operator message may be displayed by pressing the key when an alarm field is selected See Alm_Mess Alm Group Alarm Group Use To select the alarm group that will be active in the currently accessed segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 1 5 Dsp Profile screen Remarks Each alarm group may contain a different set of loop alarm settings See Loop Alm Alm Grp st Alarm Group Use To display the currently active alarm group Selections PROGRUN screen ALM Set Remarks One of
46. If the Programmer is returned to Run from a Hold condition all changes will remain active 2 If the setpoint value was changed the setpoint will now Ramp to the programmed setpoint value at the rate determined by the time left in the segment 3 If the events were changed their condition will remain until the next segment is reached 3 17 CSZ Dimension I User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Advanced Features Recycles Used to repeat a segment or group of segments The entry is available on each segment and must jump to a previous segment Range is zero to 255 cycles Note Maximum of 25 segments can be configured with recycles If more than 25 segments with recycles are programmed control ler will go to program end The cycle counter on the Program Run display keeps track of remaining cycles during the process Recycles is used with Next Seg to direct the sequence of the program When the Recycles are complete the programmer automatically advanced to the next higher segment Note 1 Recyclescannotbeusedtorepeatthe current segment Next segment is the director of program andifsetto the current segmentthe program will end 2 Maximum of25 segments can contain recycles 3 Programautomaticallyadvances whenrecycles are com PID Groups Not Used Entry of values 1 5 into PID group selection will not have any effect This is because the selection for the active PID group is decided by the control lo
47. LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications SB4 RS 422 Stop Bits Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the number of stop bits used during RS 422 communications PRINT format PR SB4 LET format LE SB4 X where X is the number of stop bits Field length 1 Value 1 or 2 Set number of stop bits to 1 or 2 This must match your host computer s setting PRINT request PR SB4 PRINT response 2 LET request LE SB4 1 LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications SC Scale Purpose Use Remarks Examples SG Segment Data Purpose Use TA088002 001 To view or change the scale value used with cascade control functions PRINT format PR SC L where L is loop number LET format LE SC L x where L is loop number x is the scale value Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X 0 to 32767 Scale is used as follows percent output ratio setpoint blend factor scale factor How this value is used is configurable by the user PRINT request PR SC 1 PRINT response 6 LET request LE SC 1 9 LET response To view or change the values of a programmer segment PRINT format PR SG P S where P is programmer S is segment LET format LE
48. Number Use To display the error number when an auto tuning error occurs Selection None Remarks Error600 Loop is not in manual Error 604 PV not responding to output change Error 605 Process not moving fast enough increase sample rate Error 606 Manual output changed during tuning process Error 607 System error Error 608 Buffer full Error 609 User Abort Auto Man Control Loop Automatic Manual Use This field is to select how the loop will be switched from Auto to Manual mode Selections CONF LOOP screen OperAM 1 OperAM 8 RemCIl 01 16 CLC IN 1 2 Locll X X NANDset 01 04 ANDset 01 04 OR set01 04 NORset 01 04 KA075771 001 A 5 DiMENSION II Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks The OperAM_1 OperAM_8 selections correspond with the switching from Auto to Manual or vise versa through the Operator Interface The selection of OperAM_1 would place the loop in Auto when LpMode01 was selected to Auto and the loop would go into manual when the LpMode01 was selected to Manual LpMode01 can be found under the LOOP__1 screen in the LpMode01 window AND OR NOR NAND selections correspond with the switching from auto to manual or vise versa through a logic function Thus the loop mode could be switched when an alarm condition occurred or an Open Sensor A latched alarm would cause the loop to remain in Manual until that alarm was acknowledged An unlatched alarm would
49. PRINT request PR AGP 1 1 PRINT response CU S275 7 3275 7 3270 7 3276 7 UUSQ7BI 3275 7 S276 7 3276 7 LET request LE AGP 1 300 0 200 10 10 10 5 5 LET response AHY Alarm Hysteresis B 26 Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the hysteresis values of a Loop alarm PRINT format PR AHY L where L is loop number LET format LE AHY L A B C D Where A is Hi Hi amp Lo Lo PV alarm hysteresis value B is Hi amp Lo PV alarm hysteresis value C is Hi Hi amp Lo Lo Deviation alarm hysteresis value D is Hi amp Lo Deviation alarm hysteresis value Field length 35 Hysteresis range for loop alarms is equal to the input range in use All four values must be specified in a LET command PRINT request PR AHY 1 PRINT response 10 0 7 pup mu oc 0 0 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL AI Analog Input Purpose Use Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS LET request LE AHY 1 5 5 2 2 LET response To view the current value of an analog input PRINT format PR AI I where is analog input number Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X analog input value PRINT request PR AI 1 PRINT response 21 0 AK Alarm Acknowledge Purpose Use Remarks Examples L AL Alarm Screen Titles Purpose Use Remarks Examples This is a write only parameter which acknowledges loop or analog input alarms L
50. Process variations The degree of RATE action is determined by the RATE setting which is expressed in minutes of duration more minutes of duration indicates stronger RATE action Note that RATE is often called Derivative control action See also PID GAIN RESET and AUTOMATIC CONTROL Relay An electrical device that opens and closes a circuit according to the presence of absence of an activating drive signal Two basic types of relays are available electromechanical and solid state An electromechanical relay uses mechanical contacts to open and close the circuit A solid state relay is a semiconductor device similar to a transistor that either conducts or does not conduct Note that a small leakage current is present even when a solid state relay is OFF not conducting See also RELAY DRIVE SIGNAL RELAY BOARD and RELAY CABLE Reset Integral I RESET control action eliminates offset or droop from setpoint For example with GAIN proportional control only a furnace temperature can stabilize at an equilibrium value below the setpoint At this offset value the process controller provides just enough heat input to balance the heat losses from the furnace Such offset can be prevented by adding RESET action to GAIN pro portional control The Dimension II provides both automatic RESET and manual RESET See also AUTO RESET MANUAL RESET DROOP OFFSET and GAIN KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s M
51. Remote Remarks When set to Operator the setpoint is entered by the operator When set to Programr the setpoint is generated by the setpoint programmer When set to Remote the setpoint comes from a source defined in control loop configuration see RemSpsrc Start Seg Programmer Starting Segment Use To selecta starting segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 1 255 Remarks Selects the segment number at which the programmer will start running when a program start is performed StopBits Communications Stop Bits Use To select the number of stop bits Selections 232 PORT or 422 PORT 10r2 Remarks Select to match your computer The most common selection is 1 stop bit KA075771 001 A 31 Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY StrtPgr Start Programmer Use To start a program running Selections PPROGRUN screen opens a window Tagname Remarks Opens a window to select a starting segment and or a program name The programmer can be started by selecting Start Sys Mode System Mode Use To display and set the system power up mode Selections UNIT screen WarmStrt or ColdStrt Remarks This parameter is changeable only on the UNIT_CNF screen WarmStrt will warm start the unit on power up restoring all parameters at the time of power down ColdStrt will cold start the unit on power up clearing memory but saving Analog O calibration and configuration T_Into
52. SG P S where P is Programmer S is segment and all segment values are listed between the quotes Field length 105 B 63 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Remarks Examples SMD System Mode B 64 Purpose Use Remarks Examples This variable views or changes an entire segment in the controller s segment table Valid segment numbers are 0 255 0 749 with the Extended Segments Option The programmer number is irrelevant since all programmers use the same segment table but it must be specified in the command The format is as follows P1 P2 P5 P4 P5 P6 P7 PB HH MM SS EEEEEEEEEEEE CCC NNN A P where P1 P8 The 8 profile setpoints There are always 8 even if the controller has less than 8 loops P1 corresponds to loop1 P2 to loop2 and so on With the LET command all 8 MUST be specified use zeros for unused profiles HH MM SS Segment time in Hours Minutes Seconds EEEEEEEEEEEE Events All 12 MUST be specified use 1 9 a b and c for events which should be on and underscores __ for events which should be off CCC Recycles 0 255 NNN Next segment A Alarm group P PID group When using a LET command ALL 14 parameters must be specified PRINT request PR SG 1 15 PRINT response one continuous message EE 2000 EN EE Co 0 0 eee 0 0 77 7 0 0 00 05 00 34 6 b 000 016 1 1 LET request one continuous message LE SG 1 1
53. STX lt 01 gt PRINT SP 1 TXF2 u pa Start of Text Command End of Text Control Character Control Character Required Space Data Message 5165 TA088002 001 B 11 Dimension l SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS B 12 In the example of a message format shown in Fig B 8 the checksum F2 is calculated with the two optional spaces If one optional space were removed from the message the checksum would be D2 if both optional spaces were removed the checksum would be B 2 Start of Text The STX control character begins any request or response mes sage If communication with the controller is interrupted a new STX must be sent by the computer to reestablish communication An STX at any time during communication cancels the communication in progress and begins a new message sequence Station Address A station address must be included in all request and response messages Station addresses must be enclosed by brackets and be two digits long e g 01 09 14 etc Spaces are not allowed between STX and the station address The station address for each controller is set using the Dimension IT Communi cations Setup screen NET ADDR field Valid addresses are 00 through 99 even though only 31 stations may be used by an RS 422 network at a time Request Message Data Field A request message requires that a command and a data message follow the station address The request message forma
54. Time Into Program Use To display the total elapsed time of the currently running program Selection PROG RUN Z screen None Remarks None T_Left Time Left in Program Use To display the time remaining in the currently running setpoint program Selection PROG_RUN screen None Remarks None T_Seg Time Left in Segment Use Tagname for time left in current segment of the setpoint programmer Selection PROG_RUN or OVIEW_ screens Display only Tagname Remarks Time left in the current segment Time is displayed as Hours Minutes Seconds This tagname can be changed on the GLOS_PRG screen The tagname will be used throughout the unit TextEnty Text Entry 1 Use To enter text selections for display configuration Selections DCON LOG screen TEXT opens a window Remarks This entry opens a window which allows the user to select an Event or Contact l O for display for each line of a selected Logic screen Up to 12 items may be selected for each logic screen A 32 KA075771 001 Dimension Il SERIEs 8700 User s MaNuAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY TimeODay Time of Day Use To enter Time of Day Selections UNIT screen Hours Minutes Seconds HH MM SS Remarks The time is entered and displayed in a 24 hour format TODSEn Time of Day Start Enable Use To enable a programmer time of day start Selections PROG RUNE screen PgOption Enable Disable Remarks When set to Enable will start p
55. You Make Selections 0o90 9956 o Turn the knob to move the selection box to the field you want to change Push on the knob A window opens to prompt you for further selections CONF LOPEI 10 54 ool Num L ool Neal Is Anla ingi D ru ik End Turn the knob to scroll through the selections Push on the knob here then turn the knob to scroll F Lorm 10 54 19 CONF E D oe Numam Obi Erb di Push on the knob when you reach the new selection through the K Ke selections for rena Vsource The window automatically updates to prompt you for more information required by your selection 4 12 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL UNiT CONFIGURATION Unit Configuration Screens UNIT CNF Screen Full Acc Lmtd Acc Chng Lvl MacroK1 MacroK2 Note These key lables are displayed on the bottom row of all screens Sys Mode Diagnost Option 1 Option 2 Fig 4 7 Unit Configuration screen Area where you can enter three two digit numbers passcode to grant operator Full Access The user may then change all control parameters both operation and configuration under this user state Fig 4 7 Area where you can enter three two digit numbers passcode to grant operator Limited Access The user is then granted partial access to the unit on the operation side Shows current access level selected Full Limited or None Displays current
56. be changed to condense or expand the display If a segment is edited that has following segments anything that follows that segment will be graphically erased When the edited segment is entered all segments will then be displayed Also when you move the selector box to the small arrow field on the display and press ENTER a vertical reference line is displayed This line can be moved horizontally by turning the knob Moving the selector box to the CLOSE field closes the graphic window and returns you to the Recipe Build screen 3 21 PROGRAMMER OPERATION CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Loop Display Screens Fig 3 15 X Y Graph Loop Display Screen 3 22 The Dimension ll system can be configured to display one user defined display for each loop These screens can be used for operator interaction with a wide range of control loop functions Press the diamond key UP or DOWN until the Loop icon is displayed To call up specific Loop displays press the diamond key LEFT or RIGHT to scroll through the displays Each control loop has a dedicated display and Loop displays can be config ured with two loop parameters displayed in the top half of the display areas in the form of X Y graphs bar graphs or large numeric characters Also windows can be accessed from these screens for specialized functions such as loop setup and auto tuning These control and display options are de scribed in the following paragraphs X Y Graph Loop
57. command cannot include comment text For example to enter a channel 2 setpoint of 59 6 LE SP 2 59 6 Fig B 8 Note The LE 1s optional see exmmnpie beta Dimension Il Serial Communications Message Format for a LET Command 5167 B 14 To enter a setpoint of 60 5 for both channels SP 1 60 5 SP 2 60 5 Since no command is specified in this example LET is assumed Response Message Data Field The format of the response message is deter mined by the type of request message command If the response message is replying to a LET or CTAG command a pound sign or error message follows the station address If the response message is replying to a PRINT LIST or STAG command either a data message or an error message follows the station address There are no spaces in a response message except those required by a system variable field length error message or spaces in the comment text included by the user The pound sign data messages and error messages are explained under System Variable Data Access in this appen dix TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS End of Text Control Character The ETX control character ends all messages A space between the data field and the ETX message is optional A space may not be used between the ETX and the checksum a space after ETX will be interpreted as being part
58. connected to chassis ground through a capacitor see Fig B 4 3 Ina distributed network connect the cable shield to chassis ground of the host computer and to the SHIELD terminal of each Dimension II DIMENSION II HOST COMPUTER SHIELD SHIELD TERMINAL WIRE CAPACITOR ede M CHASSIS GROUND GROUND TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Terminal Mode Terminal mode is a simple handshaking technique that at the user s option allows a terminal or a host computer to control the data flow from Dimension II by using two ASCII control characters X on and X off Table B 1 illustrates different methods of documenting these control characters Table B 1 Dimension X on X off Control Characters Type X on X off ASCII Name DCH DCH HEX Number 11 13 Decimal Number 17 19 When Dimension II receives an X off character it stops transmitting characters through the communication port The controller remains in this state until it receives an X on character at which time it resumes transmission The X on off characters are the only special control characters used for termi nal mode communication A station address or checksum is not required When a computer terminal is connected to Dimension II and is set for terminal mode the X on character is usually Control Q press the Control key and then while holding down the Control key also press Q
59. controlling the setpoints of loops 1 and 2 While the programmer is run ning it may be held and resumed with the following commands LE PS 1 2 H Hold programmer 1 at current segment LE PS 1 R Run programmer 1 at current segment ages If the host computer makes an illegal request message to Dimension I or if a syntax error occurs Dimension II will return an error message to the host com puter All error messages use the same six byte format an E followed by a space followed by a four digit error identification number Each type of error condition has a separate error identification number For example E 0403 is Tal Oder Hr dng Bareer ah enee variable Table B 5 lists all Error Message Error Condition E0215 Illegal pathname E 0242 Write protect read only E 0244 Read error E 0245 Write error E 0401 Bad assignment parameter E 0402 Bad string variable E 0403 Illegal system variable E 0404 Illegal assignment E 0405 Bad pathname E 0406 Incomplete path list E 0407 Read only parameter E 0408 Buffer overflow E 0409 Illegal tagname assignment B 71 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS error identification numbers and the error condition to which they call attention RS 422 RS 423 Communications Watchdog A communications watchdog is applicable for RS 422 and RS 423 communica tions The communications watchdog ensures that a CPU failure within a controller does not disab
60. determines the process variable level at or above which a high process variable alarm is triggered See also ALARM PROCESS MONITORING ALARMS LO PV LO LO PV HI HI PV HI DEV HI HI DEV LO DEV and LO LO DEV KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 GLOSSARY Initialize INI Initialize will prepare the Memory Card for files and create a directory on it If the disk was used in the past the contents will be destroyed Integral Control Action See RESET YO Abbreviation for Input Output Typically used to designate a circuit device or connector that provides both input and output signals See also I O BOARD and ANALOG I O YO Board One of the main circuit boards inside the Dimension II The I O BOARD contains the circuitry for the Dimension H s analog inputs analog outputs contact inputs and contact outputs Latching Function A function which determines the response of Dimension II when a process alarm occurs If the latching function is on LATCHING operator acknowl edgment of an alarm condition controls the alarm response If the latching function is off NOT LATCHING the existence absence of the alarm condition s controls the alarm response For more details on the LATCHING FUNCTION see Section 4 See also ALARMS Limited Access One of the possible states for the Dimension II In Limited Access mode onluy parameters on the operation side of the Dimension II Operato
61. direct out In this way the output of specific loops can be changed PRINT request PR OT 1 PRINT response 100 LET request LE OT 1 100 LET response OV Overview Screen Titles Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the titles of Overview Display screens STAG format STAG OV S where S is overview screen number CTAG format CTAG OV S X where S is overview screen number X is screen title Field length 8 Value See remarks Default screen titles include OVIEW 1 through OVIEW 8 STAG request STAG OV 1 STAG response OVIEW__ 1 CTAG request CTAG OV 1 2 OVW1 CTAG response P1 Programmer Profile 1 Values Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the first profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P1 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P1 P 2 X where P is programmer number and X is the first setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 1 will have if loop 1 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P1 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P1 1 PRINT response 98
62. format CTAG MC 2 X where X is tag name Field length 8 Default tag name is STOP STAG request STAG MC 2 STAG response STOP CTAG request CTAG MC2 OFF CTAG response Allows uploading and downloading of battery backed memory including patching and parameters PRINT format PR MI C B where C is CPU number B is Block number LET format LE MI C B where the information inside quotation marks varies according to the block being changed Field length Block 0 3 all other blocks 128 Memory image is useful in network mode only when downloading or upload ing information Block 0 contains the number of blocks for the complete memory image e g 64 All other blocks contain different information depending on which block is viewed C is always 1 PRINT request PR MI 1 0 PRINT response 64 LET request LE MI 1 1 OOOAFC 76ED LET response 128 characters To monitor or change the manual reset bias value PRINT format PR MR L where L is Loop LET format LE MR L XX X Field length 8 Value XX X 100 00 to 100 00 Manual reset adds a fixed bias onto the control calculation when a control loop is in automatic mode PRINT request PR MR 1 PRINT response 0 00 LET request LE MR 1 2 00 LET response NA2 RS 232 Network Address Purpose TA088002 001 To view or change the network address of the controller for RS 232 communi cations in net
63. format PR CD L where L is loop number Field length 8 Value XXXXX XX Displays the rate that will be used if auto tuning values are accepted PRINT request PR CD 1 PRINT response 2 00 To view or change the state into which a programmer is attempting to place the events PRINT format PR CEV P where P is programmer LET format LE CEV P 2 XXXXXXXXXXXX where P is programmer and XXXXXXXXXXXX is a 12 character string of event states Field length 12 Value If specific events 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c are displayed or included in the LET command the programmer is set to turn those events on If under scores are displayed or included in the LET command the programmer is set to turn events in those locations off The LET command will only work if the programmer s status is Hold or PG END Otherwise CEV reverts to the event state programmed by the cur rent segment This variable is different from EV Event Outputs in that EV displays the actual current state of a single event and CEV displays the state into which a specific programmer is programmed to set all events PRINT request PR CEV 1 PRINT response 1 A 7 b LET request LE CEV 1 45 8 c LET response CI Configuration Image B 34 Purpose Use Remarks Examples Allows uploading and downloading of EEPROM information including opera tor interface and network configuration PRINT format PR CI C B whe
64. in Figure 5 will appear From this window the high and low input limit alarm values for the analog input are entered by highlight ing the entry pressing the knob turning right to view InPutAlm _ AN LooP_Alm__Lo Figure 4 Alarm Group Setting Screen options and pressing again to enter selection Turn the knob moving the cursor box to Close_Wn entry and press the knob to return to the main Alarm Setting screen ALM_SET screen Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to Loop_Almfield press the knob once and rotate right to select the desired loop on which to configure loop alarm parameters Press the knob once and the window shown in Figure 6 will be displayed Turn the knob moving the cursor box tothe AlarmGp entry and push knob Turn knob HiLmtal MEN a T LoLmtBl Close Hn E LOSE Gi CAAA NNNNNNNK ra sI HABA I J J J 1 1 J J Figure 6 Alarm xxxxx window to view alarm group selections and press the knob again to enter alarm group selection Five alarm groups are avail able After selecting the alarm groups select the desired alarm values in the same manner that you selected alarm groups Once all of the entries have been made turn the knob right to Close Wn and push knob to enter The entered parameters will be in effect If an alarm occurs the Alarmicon will beginto blink Selectingthis icon will display the active alarms Alarm Configuration Page2 USING AUTOTUNE The Dimension autotuning alg
65. included in the same data message by separating the system variables with semicolons e g SP 1 PV 2 DV 2 The process of linking two or more system variables together in this manner is referred to as concat enation For a PRINT command the data message consists of just the desired system variable s see Fig B 9 For example To monitor the channel 2 setpoint PR SP 2 To monitor the channel 2 setpoint and deviation PR SP 2 DV 2 The PRINT command can also include comment text enclosed in quotes and placed in front of the system variable s For example PR The Ch 2 setpoint is SP 2 PR Ch 2 is SP 2 deviation 2 is DV 2 one continuous message Fig B 7 Dimension Il Serial Communications Message Format for a PRINT Command STX lt 01 gt PR SP 1 ETXC7 ACK OR NAK HOST ENO DIMENSION II COMPUTER 4 DIGIT ERROR 4 SPACES CODE 2 DIGITS Maaa 1 STX lt 01 gt 10 0ETXIF OR STX lt OI gt E ETX CHECKSU ACK OR NAK This setpoint field length is eight characters Since the setpoint data in this example is four digits long Dimension transmits four spaces followed by 10 0 5166 TA088002 001 B 13 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS For a LET command the data message contains the new system variable value preceded by an equal sign and enclosed in single or double quotation marks Fig B 10 Note that a LET
66. indicated a warning condition HiDev A high deviation alarm point that trips when the PV exceeds its band width LoLoDV A low deviation alarm point designated as low low to indicate it can be used as a second LoDev trip point just outside the LowDev second has indicated a warning condition LoDV A low deviation alarm point that trips when the PV exceeds its band width Alm Grp HiHiPV LoLoPV HiPV LoPV HiHiDV LoLoDV HiDev CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Critical Alarm Window When a critical alarm occurs an informational window will be displayed as to the cause of the alarm Fig 2 20 To silence the alarm press the multifunctional knob once To clear the alarm press the knob a second time The unit will not reset until the alarm condition has been cleared and the alarm acknowledged CRIT ALM indicates that one of the following critical alarms has occurred CRITALM Critical Alarm Message Chamb Lo Chamber limit has exceeded min temperature setting Chamb Hi Chamber limit has exceeded max temperature setting Prod Lo Product Limit has exceeded min temperature setting Prod Hi Product limit has exceeded max temperature setting 23Backup Mechanical backup safety on HFC 23 system has tripped 404Backup Mechanical backup safety on HFC 404A system has tripped Prod Lim External product Hi Lo limit has indicated a temp out of range Multiple Multiple alarms have occurred simultaneous
67. label or tagname and function for each of the two macro keys located directly below the display screen With these keys you have the ability to simplify operation by redefining each key to perform a selectable function for a spe cific loop The CSZ Dimension Il can be set to one of three system mode parameters Warm Start Unit functions will default to OFF on power up AutoStart All settings are saved on power up and Cold Start All data residing in memory will be erased when line power is removed Opens a series of windows used to display the current software version number and run diagnostic performance tests on both the control cage and operator interface Lists the features functions and capabilities of the Dimension II model you purchased compared to the maximum configuration available to purchase KA075771 001 td Hoc H La Lw l F Hacrok i hacroky2 L Sus Mode D Diadsdnost E 30 HIH cuu dra 44 Cl t op OD rao get ion 1 En Dption 2 Enter Unit CONFIGURATION Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Setting Up Security Access Passcodes You may configure your Dimension II system for one of three security access levels FULL Full access granted operation and configuration LIMITED Partial access granted operation NONE No access granted view only With the NONE or LIMITED level set system users must enter a 6 digit passcode three 2 digit fields 00
68. logic assignments This could allow fast forward to be initiated from one of several points If all four programmers fast forward sources were selected to be the same then all four programmers would be placed in fast forward when the appropriate fast forward source became true The rate at which the program mers execute is determined by the warp factor If the warp factor is set to 10 and the programmer fast forward was enabled then the programmer would run the recipe in a tenth of the time it would normally take to complete that recipe Gain__ Control Loop PID Gain Use Selections Remarks To set PID gain for control loop LOOP screens LpMode 0 01 to 327 67 Gain is a multiplication term expressing how the control loop output varies with respect to the control loop deviation process variable setpoint The effect of gain on the control loop output can be calculated from the following equation Output 96 Deviation Input Span Gain GuarSoak Guaranteed Soak KA075771 001 Use Selections Remarks Opens a window to allow enabling the program guaranteed soak function CONF PRG screen GuarSoak ENABLE DISABLE Guaranteed soak causes the programmer to HOLD when either Hi or Lo deviation limits are exceeded The deviations limits are set at the ALM SET screen using the Loop Alm parameter for the loop associated with this pro grammer Programmer one is associated with loop one and so forth A 15 Dimens
69. loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P6 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P6 3 2 100 7 LET response P7 Programmer Profile 7 Values B 54 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To view or change the seventh profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P7 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P7 P X where P is programmer number and X is the seventh setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 7 will have if loop 7 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P7 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P7 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P7 3 2 100 7 LET response P8 Programmer Profile 8 Values Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the eighth profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P8 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P8 P X where P is programmer number and X is the eighth setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any
70. new information should be saved on a memory card Memory Card Operation Important If the system is set up for a warm start all parameters and data residing in memory will be maintained by battery power up to several years after a power down and the system will resume where it left off when powered up again If the system is set up for a cold start however all data and configuration parameters residing in memory will be erased when line power is removed All configuration and operational parameters then must be reconfigured or reloaded from memory cards The following procedure explains how you can save your new configuration data onto removable memory cards With your information saved on one or more memory cards you can load the data into Dimension Ill system memory at any time Save your data onto memory cards as follows 1 Use the diamond key to access the Unit Operation icon The system will display the Unit Operation screen 2 Insert a memory card into the card slot on the operator interface front panel 3 Use the knob to select the MEM_CARD field The system will display 2 31 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE 3 Use the knob to select the MEM CARD field The system will display the Memory Card Operation Window shown in Fig 2 29 The following infor mation and functions are provided in this window The first line describes the current status of the memory card slot
71. of the checksum Checksum To verify the accuracy of each transmission a two character checksum is included at the end of each request and response message The checksum is based on the 8 bit binary sum of all characters from the STX to and including the ETX The checksum characters are the two least significant hex digits in the sum Table B 2 illustrates the checksum generation process Table B 2 Checksum Generation Example Sample ASCII Message STX lt 01 gt LET SP 1 56 3 ETX97 HEX MESSAGE HEX RUNNING CHARACTER EQUIVALENT SUM STX 02 02 3C 3E 0 30 6E 1 31 9F gt 3E DD SPACE 20 FD L 4C 149 E 45 18E T 54 1E2 SPACE 20 202 S 53 255 P 50 2A5 28 2CD 31 2FE 29 327 3D 364 22 386 5 35 3BB 6 36 3F1 2E 41F 3 33 452 22 474 SPACE 20 494 ETX 03 497 97 CHECKSUM The first and last spaces and the T in LET are optional they are included in this example only for clarity The only space required is between LETand SP 1 This example message could also be written STX lt 01 gt LE SP 1 56 3 ETX03 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Table B 3 ASCII Character Codes in Hexadecimal and Decimal B 16 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Fig B 9 Test Program SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS For information on hex to decimal and decimal to hex conversion see table B 3 Error Chec
72. outputs selecting each I O card and point as described in tables 4 2 and 4 3 Table 4 2 Analog Output Selections DevOutL Deviation of control loop DirOutL Direct acting output of control loop SPxmitL Setpoint retransmit of control loop Retrans Event_ Event when high output is full on Logic set when true output is full on 4 31 Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 18 Output Configuration Parameter Selection Windows R3C4 UE Configuration 5120 4 32 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL tL Anaut d Cloge Mn ELOSE Analo Local Contact Output Selections pu CSTARTI CSTOP Remote Contact Output Selections IN A lanrm PemCO PI_LAl arm PemCO i16 Clogs Jh Kl LOSE KA075771 001 Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Table 4 3 Contact Output Selections OperRH_ Operator Run Hold for programmer PrgEnd_ Program end for programmer RemCi__ Remote contact input 1 16 CLC_Out CLC optional calculated output 1 2 Operation Display Configuration Screens In addition to terminology glossary changes Dimension Il Operation displays can be custom built to present process information in the best format possible to suit specific application requirements The Display Configuration screens described in the following paragraphs are used to select the number format and contents of these Operation display
73. outputs Setting the cycle time to some value other than 0 causes the contact output to become a TP output If retrans mitting a PV or SP on a contact output the range must be 0 00 to 100 00 since the output limits can not be changed for contact outputs CC Diag Control Cage Diagnostics Use Selection Remarks To check the status of the control cage boards Diagnost Opens a window This window is informational only it displays the current software level for the CPU Contact and Analog boards in the control cage If the boards are not found NotFound will be displayed If the boards have a failure the error number will be displayed Chng Lvl Change Access Level Use Selections Remarks To change the access level from a higher level to a lower level If current Access FULL the FULL LIMITED or NONE is selectable If current Access LIMITED then LIMITED or NONE is selectable If current Access NONE then this entry is not selectable If LIMITED is selected then the passcode for FULL access is blanked from the display If NONE is selected then both the FULL and LIMITED access passcodes are blanked from the display In order to restore a higher access level it is necessary to enter the correct passcode by selecting Access on the UNIT screen All parameters on the UNIT_CNF side require an access level of FULL to modify All parameters on the operating UNIT side require a level of LIMITED to modify Only t
74. read from write to display a directory delete or format memory cards Information that can be stored on CSZ Dimension Il memory cards includes Programmer profile programs 1 8 Recipes Total memory image of CSZ Dimension II configuration and opera tional parameters Mem Img Display configuration Dsp Conf Macro key configuration MacroKy User written CLC program BASIC See pp 2 31 32 33 34 for instructions on using the memory card 2 5 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Screen Display Format Screen backlighting can be manually turned on or off or can be set to automati cally turn on and off at specific times As shown in Fig 2 2 every CSZ Dimen sion Il screen display includes the following common elements SCREEN TITLE The title of the currently displayed screen is displayed on the top row of the screen Most screen titles are user definable SELECTOR BOX HOME POSITION A blinking graphic box displayed on the top row of the screen indicates that the selector box controlled by turning the multi function knob is located in its home inactive position Whenever you call up a new screen the selector box is displayed in its home position Note A second smaller box is displayed inside Note On the CSZ screen and the Prod Limit another graphic box to the left of the selector screen the home position for the selector box is box in the ho
75. revert to the auto mode as soon as the alarm condition went away The alarm logic can be switch if a low alarm is used instead of a high alarm Using a contact input through the logic sets cause the logic of the contact input to be inverted RemCl 01 16 selections correspond with the switching from auto to manual or vise versa through a contact input This would allow the loop status to be switched from a remote location If it is desired to have the contact input logic inverted use the contact inputs through the logic sets see above If all four loops have their LpModes selected to be the same source then all four loops would switch form Auto to Manual at the same time by one action AutoTune Auto Tuning Use Selections Remarks To initiate Auto Tuning of control loop PID parameters Loop_ screen LpMode_ SetParms Start Abort Set the Start to initiate auto tuning The control loop must be in Manual and the process should be stable Change to Abort to stop Backlite Display Back Lighting Use Selection Remarks To set the state of the backlight UNIT screen opens a window The present state on or off of the backlight is shown The window opens to allow the backlight to be turned on off or cycled on and off If Cycle is selected at the Set parameter the backlighting is turned on and off at the time entered for On and Off Time is entered in 24 hour Hours Minutes Seconds HH MM SS format BaudRate Comm
76. screens Run or Hold Tagname Remarks Run places the programmer in run at the current point in the program This is usually used after a program hold Hold places the programmer in hold at the current point in the program This field will display PG END when the pro gram runs to completion This tagname can be changed on the GLOS PRG screen The tagname will be used throughout the unit PgNumber Programmer Number Use To select a Programmer for configuration Selections CONF PRG screen Progmr01 to Progmr08 Remarks This entry selects the Programmer for configuration PgOption Programmer Options Use Opens a window Selection PROGRUN screen None Remarks Provides access to Time cf Day start Fast Forward Abort and Remote Start PgSpt Programmed Setpoint LAN Use To display the programmed setpoint generated by the setpoint programmer Selections OVIEW__ or PROGRUN screens Remarks This setpoint is used by the control loop when the setpoint source is set to Programr See SptSrc KA075771 001 A 23 DIMENSION l SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY PID_Group PID Group Use To select the group of PID parameters that will be active in the currently accessed segment Selection _PROGRUN screen PgBuild 1 5 Remarks This entry is only valid if programmed PID groups has been selected see PID_Type PID_Grp PID Group ow Ki c To display the currently active
77. screens are organized into six groups or rows with each row identified on screen by a graphic icon Unit Configuration Screen Glossary Configuration Screens Process Configuration Screens Sdt Display Configuration Screens Hardware I O Setup and Calibration Screens Communications Setup Screens Several rows have multiple screens Each screen in the row groups together a related set of configuration parameters KA075771 001 4 3 Dmension Seres 8700 User s Manual Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 1 Map of Screens Used for Configuration ast eH Sieg SSC n 1L Enter n 2 Enter MIT WM NIT ep UNIT CNF DUERIITEN Ou ni ieu PROGRAM Format x Tot alOur_i Tnpt Num nl Inet Tubo__T up SeleFunc _Con fi InbtLouL im InbtHiL im CSTART ETOP Enable Disable 4 4 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MaNuAL Unit CONFIGURATION The four letters eg R3C1 near each screen in Fig 4 1 indicate the relative position of each screen in the configuration screen map For example the Programmer Configuration Screen titled CONF PRG is labled R3C1 to indicate its position as Row 3 Column 1 The diamond shaped key on the Operator Interface is used to select the screen you need to move to configure a specific parameter The diamond key is used to move up or down and left or right as described below Moving Up or Down a Row Figure 4 2 illustrates how to use the diamond key
78. select 10 as the start of the Recipe Fig 3 12 As an alternative define a unique stop segment that can be used with all Recipes For example Segment 250 You may not required assign a Recipe number to this Stop segment Then the user will select a Recipe number and not need to remember the stop segment number Fig 3 12 Stop a Recipe PSU L LOM En er FerBu ilc Build CSTARTI STOF 2 Use Stop Macro Key Configure the Macro Key to start a user defined Recipe example Recipe 8 to stop the current Recipe and start Recipe 8 Recipe 8 will be defined with safe setpoints minimum time and per haps the events turned off Its start segment is user defined The control loops can also be set to manual and all control outputs set to zero with the macro key configuration 3 16 CSZ Dimension II User s MaNuAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Hold Function If desired the user can stop the Programmer from running by putting the PgMode to Hold with all the current conditions active Select Run and change to Hold The Setpoint Alarm Group PID Group or Events can be selected and changed These changes will become active immediately when the cursor knob is pushed after the selection Fig 3 13 Fig 3 13 Putting the Programmer in Hold PROGRUN1 OF 12 49 04 PoModebl d Hold CSTART STOP Hold Run can also be activated by Alarms as with Guaranteed Soak or by a remote input configuration choice Note 1
79. standard default values i e controller in manual with 0 output KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY Configuration The relative arrangement of elements in a circuit device or system Also the act of establishing such an arrangement of elements The act of configuration typically consists of interconnecting elements selecting or enabling disabling features and entering parameters Some of the Dimension II hardware and software is configured to match the customer order prior to shipment from the factory Additional hardware and software configuration is performed by the user during installation to match the specific requirements of the application See also PARAMETER CONFIGURATION PARAMETER CONFIGURATION ACCESS HARDWARE and SOFTWARE Configuration Parameter A user entered setting that determines one of the basic operating characteristics of the of the system or controller e g output action reverse direct or bi modal and ranges Contact Input A circuit that senses whether an input terminal is closed connected to com mon or open not connected to common Control Signal An output signal from a process controller that is used to control an element e g valve heater etc which controls the process Controller See PROCESS CONTROLLER CTS Abbreviation for Clear To Send CTS is a handshaking signal used in the RS 232 protocol to coordinate digital communications
80. table 4 4 may be selected Fig 4 22 Available Display Formats for Control Loop Screen HOR BAR Two parameters are XY CHART Two parameters are TEXT 3X Three parameters displayed in a horizontal bar charted versus time and four may be displayed in 3X text format and five parameters may parameters may be displayed as format and four parameters may be displayed as text be displayed as text 28 6 St B S eu L4 LeModeai Manual 4 38 KA075771 001 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Build Dimension i Loop displays as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Loop Display Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 23 Use the knob to select the LOOP_SCR field 3 Select the desired loop display title number If you wish to change the display configuration use the knob to select the FORMAT field 5 Select your format choice from the list of available formats Horizontal Bar X Y Chart Text 3X The system will display a configuration window for the selected format 6 In the window select parameters that will be displayed on the new Loop display as prompted Parameters refer to table 4 4 include graphic representations of specific values and displayed text The new configuration is now loaded in memory and can be saved onto a memory card Fig 4 23 Loop Display Configuration Screen Format CSTARTI STOP KA075771 001 4 39 Unit CONFIGURATION Dime
81. tagname STAG PV 1 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Table B 4 System Variables Code Title Access Code Title Access AB Abort Enable RW P EU Engineering Units RW ACL Access Level R EV Event Outputs R ACP Accept Input RW L FPC Full Passcode RW ACY Analog Output Time Propor GAS Global Alarm Status R tioning Cycle Time R W O GN Gain R W L AGP Alarm Group R W HH2 RS 232 Hardware Handshaking R W AHY Alarm Hysteresis R W L HH4 RS 422 Hardware Handshaking R W Al Analog Input RI IAS Input Alarm Status RI AK Alarm Acknowledge W LI IH Input High Alarm RW AL Alarm Screen Titles RW TS IHL Input High Limit RW ALL All Input Range Names Ri THY Input Alarm Hysteresis RW ALT Alarm Latch R W L IL Input Low Alarm RW AO Analog Output RO ILL Input Low Limit RW AS Alarm Status RL ILT Input Alarm Latch RWI ATD Activate Time of Day Start R W P LG Logic Screen Titles R W T S BC2 RS 232 Bits Character R W LND Linear Analog Input Decimal RW BC4 RS 422 Bits Character R W Position BD2 RS 232 Baud Rate RW LNS Linear Analog Input Span RW BD4 RS 422 Baud Rate RW LNZ Linear Analog Input Zero RW BEU CLC Basic Engineering Units R W LP Loop Screen Titles R W T S BF Blend Factor R W L LPC Limited Passcode R W BHL CLC Basic High Limit R W LS Loop Status R W L BLL CLC Basic Low Limit RW MC1 Macro Name 1 R W T BLV CLC Basic List Variable R W MC2
82. time and continues until power down VER BAR2 dis plays 2 vertical bar graphs to the left of the screen with the 2 selected bar graph parameters also displayed in 2X text to right of the bargraphs There is also two additional selections one 2X text on top and 1X text on the bottom VER BAR3 displays 3 vertical bar graphs with one line of text at the bottom VER BARA displays 4 vertical bar graphs TEXT 3X displays 3 parameters in 3X text at the top with 4 lines of text at the bottom TEXT 2X displays 8 parameters in 2X text TEXT displays 12 parameters in 1X text Full Acc Full Access Passcode Use Toenter a passcode for FULL Access Selections UNIT screen Full Acc 00 00 00 three 2 digit numbers Remarks This is the passcode that will need to be entered to bring the unit to FULL access if the present access is LIMITED or NONE The current access must be FULL to select this entry FUNC Memory Card Function Use To select a memory card function Selections UNIT screen Mem Card Func READ WRITE DIRECT FORMAT DELETE Remarks READ reads the selected FILE from the memory card into unit memory WRITE writes the selected FILE from unit memory to the memory card DIRECT lists the directory of FILEs on the memory card FORMAT formats a memory card Memory card must be formatted before a read or write can be made to the card A 14 KA075771 001 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR IN
83. to move up or down a row in the configuration screens map Moving From Screen to Screen Across a Row Figure 4 3 illustrates how to use the diamond key to move left or right across a row of screens Configuration Screens Overview KA075771 001 Configuration is accomplished by entering information with the operator interface on variety of special purpose configuration screens The following paragraphs describe highlights of each group row of Dimen sion Il Configuration screens Unit Configuration Screen The Unit Configuration screen is accessed by first pressing the diamond key UP or DOWN until the Unit icon RI logo is highlighted If you are in the Opera tion area press the diamond key LEFT or RIGHT to switch to the Configuration area If the system access level is NONE or LIMITED you must also enter the correct passcode The Unit Configuration screen is used to configure or perform a variety of unit or system level functions passcode assignment changing access level building macro key functions setting system power up mode running built in self diag nostics and displaying the model number and options installed in your unit 4 5 DimENSION ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 2 The Diamond Key Moving Up or Down a Row of Screens When you are at the top row and press the top of the diamond SE y you will move to emm pur th bottom row Loop Loic Alarm Press the to
84. tune parameters PRINT format PR RSD L where L is loop number LET format LE RSD L x where L is loop number x is response type Field length 8 Value Fast Medium Slow Before auto tuning a loop select the response speed of the process you are controlling A process which responds quickly to a change in control output will be tuned differently from a process which responds slowly PRINT request PR RSD 1 PRINT response Fast LET request LE RSD 1 Medium LET response B 61 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS RSS Remote Start Segment RT Rate Purpose Use Remarks Examples Purpose Use Remarks Examples SA Setpoint Adjust SB2 RS 232 Stop Bits B 62 Purpose Use Remarks Examples Purpose Use To change or view the remote start segment for a given programmer PRINT format PR RSS P where P is programmer LET format LE RSS P X where P is programmer cand X is a segment number Field length 8 Value 0 255 0 749 with Extended Segments Option Each programmer has one Remote Start Segment RSS number This is the segment where the programmer will start running if a remote start is executed Note that a programmer start done via the network with the PS parameter is considered an Operator start NOT a Remote start PRINT request PR RSS 1 PRINT response 3 LET request LE RSS 1 2 LET re
85. until that alarm was acknowledge An unlatched alarm would revert to the RUN mode as soon as the alarm condition went away The alarm logic can be switch if a low alarm is used instead of a high alarm Using a contact input through the logic sets cause the logic of the contact input to be inverted One application would be if all four programmer are to be synchro nized together a guaranteed soak could be achieved by using deviation alarms If the DV Alarm was used in a ANDset2 and all the programmer had their programmer status source tied to ANDset2 then when any loop had an devia tion alarm all four programmers would be placed in hold until that alarm condition went away RemCI 1 8 selections correspond with the switching from RUN to HOLD or vise versa through a contact input If all four loops have their Pg Mode selected to be the same source then all four loops would switch from RUN to HOLD at the same time PVsource Process Variable Source A 26 Use Selections Remarks To select a source to be used for the process variable CONF_LOP screen Anlgin01 AnlginO6 Analn1 2 Analn3 4 Analn5 6 Calc 1 Calc 2 RH1 RH2 There are four different types of inputs that can be used as the process variable The first is an analog input next is an option to use inputs 1 and 2 3 and 4 or 5 and 6 third is a calculated input and fourth is a wet bulb dry bulb calculation of RH In every case the PV can be digitally filtered The
86. used when Thermocouple or RTD inputs are selected These limits are used by the PID control algorithm as the range of the input to be controlled They are also used by the operator interface to limit operator setpoint entries The limits are stored in the EEPROM of the analog I O card KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MaNUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY InptType Input Type Use Selections Remarks Selects the desired input type INPUTS screen Type J Type K Type T Type R Type S Type E Type N Pltnl ll Type B Type G Type C Type D RTD am 1 RTD eu 1 0 100mv 0 10volt 0 5volt 4 20ma 0 20ma PG_CH_01 PG CH 02 PG CH 03 PG CH 04 Altitude NiNi Mo In addition analog I O jumpers must be set accordingly In addition to the thermocouple types RTD s and linear inputs there are four channels labeled PG CH 01 PG CH 02 PG CH 03 and PG CH 04 These are used by the factory to calibrate the four independent programmable gain channels for the analog inputs See calibration instructions for more information InputAlm Input Alarm Use Selections Remarks Keypd Keypad Test Use Selections Remarks In CONF_ALM opens a window to select input alarm hysteresis value and latching action In Alm_Set opens a window to select alarm limits ALM_SET or CONF_ALM screen ANLGIN_1 to ANLGIN_4 Hysteresis value and the latching action are vali
87. view the number of an error that occurred during loop auto tuning PRINT format PR TEN L where L is loop number Field length 8 600 Loop not in manual mode 604 PV not responding to output change 605 Process not moving fast enough increase sample rate 606 Manual output changed during tuning process 607 System error 608 Buffer full 609 User abort PRINT request PR TEN 1 PRINT response 600 B 67 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS TER Tuning Error Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the yes no error status of loop auto tuning PRINT format PR TER L where L is loop number Field length 8 Value Error or blank Error Error occurred during auto tuning Blank No errors during auto tuning PRINT request PR TER 1 PRINT response Error TL Time Left in Segment SEG time Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor the amount of time left in the current segment PRINT format PR TL P where P is programmer Field length 8 Value HH MM SS This system variable monitors the amount of time left in the current segment for a specific programmer PRINT request PR TL 1 PRINT response 00 08 34 TLP Time Left in Program Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the amount of time left in a program PRINT format PR TLP P where P is programmer number Field length 8 Value HH
88. will require setting Multiplier one and two should be set to one according to our example and scale selection will be two Using the method described above select all values of the equation Close window by pressing the knob Another application may involve the operator adding to or subtracting from the process variable indicated because exact positioning of the thermocouple is not possible A variable signal 0 5 VDC is summed with the actual process variable creating a calculated process variable For example analog input one input is 340 and the operator has added 12 to the reading Now the process variable reading is 352 The equation would be 340 x 1 12 x 1 1 This calculated input is performed to improve the control process where exact sensor placement is not possible To execute use the steps outlined above Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Specifications and Ordering Information KA075771 001 D 1 DIMENSION II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Specifications and Ordering Information Model 8705 Technical Specifications and Ordering Information Model 8725 Technical Specifications and Ordering Information Model 8781 Technical Specifications and Ordering Information Model 8782 Technical Specifications and Ordering Information kk ob gt D 2 KA075771 001 DIMENSION Modol 8705 Dimension Il Model 8705 Controller Specifications r 1 1 Ol Process Manager CPU e 1 4 Loops 0 4
89. 0 0 to 100 0 The reverse output high limit RH can never be less than the reverse output low limit RL PRINT request PR RH 1 PRINT response 100 00 LET request LE RH 1 50 LET response Permits uploading and downloading of recipe information PRINT format PR RI C B where C is CPU number B is block number LET format LE RI C B x where C is CPU number B is block number x is the block of information being read or written Field length Block 0 3 all other blocks 128 Value See remarks RI is useful in the network mode only when information is being uploaded or downloaded This function creates a direct image of memory storing recipe values only profiles segment time recycles segments alarm groups PID groups Block 0 contains the number of blocks for the complete recipe image The information in all other blocks depends on the block being viewed C is always 1 PRINT request PR QS 1 0 PRINT response 128 LET request LE QS 1 1 OOOAFC76ED 128 characters LET response RL Reverse Output Low Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or change the reverse output low limit RL This feature allows the user to set the minimum output percentage for reverse outputs PRINT format PR RL L where L is loop LET format LE RL L XXX X where L isloop and X is the limit Field length 8 Value XXX X 0 0 to 100 0 The reverse output low limit RL
90. 00 0 to 932 932 to 2066 2066 to 3812 3812 to 4200 328 to 1166 20 to 1760 20 to 500 500 to 1760 20 to 1760 20 to 500 500 to 1760 270 to 1000 270 to 225 225 to 130 130 to 1000 20 to 1300 20 to 500 500 to 1300 32 to 2408 0 to 1300 47 to 1820 47 to 190 199 to 300 300 to 900 900 to 1820 20 to 2315 20 to 700 700 to 1990 1990 to 2315 20 to 2315 20 to 1990 1990 to 2315 20 to 2315 20 to 500 500 to 1130 1130 to 2100 2100 to 2315 200 to 630 1 1 80 00 American Alpha Overall Accuracy Temperature Coefficient 0 002 0 001 Omv to 100mv Ov to 10v Oma to 20ma Linear Millivolt Voltage Current 72 F or 22 C 0 02 FS Note Overall range is indicated in bold type SOUS 10 e190d0 jesjeAium ww seuour ur suorsueg I su oisueuimq 69UBJE9 9 B qeo pue 10jo8uuoo 10 jaued ui ojDuejooJ Sc 2 X 8 0 10 BOI JOJOWEBIP Gc c IND Suoneoo p ejou Bui junow peddei ze 8 JOSS920Jgd SUONESIUNWWOD pue 1ndino indu S028 I su oisueuiiq ww seuour ui suorsueuimq seo SZ6191 51 9 TM Szp szz Sz9 e IZIS MAYOS GAGNSWNOOIY IIH vla 810 SEDSIE S SCO vL1 818 9 kelen 8S 89 0L 2 OS 12 Ve ScC 6v 1 S18 S OS1 16 S Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Glossary KA075771 001 E 1 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Glossary Acknowledge A response that
91. 00 min SetParms CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Loop Auto Tuning Note Prior to starting auto tuning the following items must be considered 1 OUTPUT ACTION Reverse or Direct 2 SAMPLE RATE 20 30 for typical applications 3 LOOP MODE Manual 4 PROCESS OPERATION At some nominal and relatively stable operating point Read the TUNE section in Appendix A for further discussion and calculations The loop Auto Tune Window shown in Fig 3 19 can be accessed from any Loop display screen X Y Graph Bar Graph Numeric Character Select the AUTOTUNE window from the Loop Setup window Loop Display Loop Mode Fig 3 19 Loop Auto Tune Window Reverse Fast Reverse Fast CLOSE The purpose of this window is to perform an automated loop tuning function during initial system setup This function is intended to save time and provide increased control efficiency and accuracy On this screen you can initiate auto tuning for the selected loop view the calcu lated values and accept or reject the values for use with the loop Tuning status and the calculated gain reset and rate are displayed 3 25 PROGRAMMER OPERATION CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Loop Auto Tune Window selections and displayed information include AutoTune Select Start to initiate auto tuning Abort to cancel auto tuning TuneErr1 ERROR indicated auto tuning errors FALSE indicates successful auto tuning
92. 10 0 percent to 10 0 percent adjoining band deadband and overlapping band 0 2 Second Faster update speed available Please consult factory Analog 13 bits 0 015 percent Time proportioned 8 bits 0 4 percent Nine alarms per control loop High High high Low Low low process variable and process deviation Five groups of process alarm values Failed sensor alarm Two alarms for each analog input High and Low RS 232 single drop and RS 422 multidrop or IEEE 488 ENQ ACK 300 1200 2400 9600 19 2K RS 232 50 feet 15 m RS 422 4000 feet 1200 m 8 feet 2 4m used to connect the operator interface panel to the 8705 control cage LCD with backlighting 160 pixels wide x 128 pixels high Temperature Coefficient Overall Accuracy 00012 72 F or 22 C FSPer F FS Per C 100 to120 1 00 FS 80 to 100 0 75 FS 50 to 80 0 25 FS 0 to 50 0 10 FS Table 1 Standard Dimension Input Types Ranges C F Se ue Temperature Coefficient T 328 to 752 200 to 400 1 80 0 81 Platinel II 32 to 2580 0 to 1420 NiNiMoly B European or 0 to 3200 0 to 932 932 to 3200 0 to 3200 0 to 932 932 to 3200 454 to 1832 454 to 373 373 to 202 202 to 1832 0 to 2370 0 to 932 932 to 2370 116 to 3300 116 to 374 374 to 572 572 to 1652 1652 to 3300 0 to 4200 0 to 1242 1242 to 3614 3614 to 4200 0 to 4200 0 to 3614 3614 to 4200 0 to 42
93. 14 Air_Temp Rel_Hum Prod_Temp Hi_Limit Anlgin 5 Anlgin 6 Displays the air temperature reading in the chamber from a thermocouple located in the air stream at the discharge of the plenum Displays the percentage of relative humidity reading from a sensor located in the air stream at the discharge of the plenum Displays the product temperature reading from a thermocouple that is located inside the chamber coiled up and dedicated for the customer s part Displays the chamber air temperature reading from a thermocouple located just above the heating element behind the plenum This sensor is a redundant sensor for chamber protection only SPARE SPARE 96 RelHum Prod Temp HiLimit Anlgin 5 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Digital In Screen The Digital In Screen displays the status of the contact inputs Fig 2 15 ExtLimit 1PS 4PS Fig 2 15 Digital Input Screen Indicates the status of an external high low limit control an optional feature If the input is on the limit control is in a good state Indicates the status of the mechanical back up pressure switch for the Stage 1 compressor This switch is factory set at 310 psi and will automatically reset when the pressure drops below its trip point However a critical alarm must be reset by the operator once the pressure switch has automatically reset itself Indicates the status of the mechanical back up pr
94. 17 2 Use the knob to select the InputAlm field 3 Select the tag name of the analog input for which you wish to configure alarm parameters Tag names may be changed as described in Glossary tag names Configuration in this section 4 The system will display the Input Alarm Hysteresis Latch Window shown in Fig 4 17 5 Enter the desired input hysteresis value InptHys_ and select Latch or Unlatch for the selected input alarm i 6 Close the window and select the LOOP ALARM field 7 Select a loop number The system will display the Loop Alarm Hyster esis Latch Window shown in Fig 4 17 8 Enter hysteresis values and latch unlatch characteristics for the selected loop in the Loop Alarm Hysteresis Latch Window 9 When done close the window Note Auser entered help message can be displayed when the Help keyis pressed with an alarm fora specific loop displayed onthe Alarm Status screen Referto Alarm Status Screen Help Message Entry in the Operator Interface display configuration section formessage entry instructions KA075771 001 4 29 Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 17 Alarm Configuration Parameter Selection Windows Input Alarm gt Hysterisis amp Gi Latch R3C3 Alarm conhguraton 36 JACI SEENEN nat Pegs tin 4 Srenaain m Output Alarm Logic Sets EJ a 4 Input OR Gate e gU Input Selection B OR NOR amp AND NAND Logic Sets Input Se
95. 2 PRINT response LET request LE BC2 8 LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications BC4 RS 422 Bits Character Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the number of bits per character used for RS 422 communications PRINT format PR BC4 LET format LE BC4 X where X is 7 or 8 Field length 1 Value 7 8 7 bits per character 7 8 bits per character 8 PRINT request PR BC4 PRINT response LET request LE BC4 8 LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications TA088002 001 B 29 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BD2 RS 232 Baud Rate Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the baud rate used for RS 232 communications PRINT format PR BD2 LET format LE BD2 X where X is baud rate Field length 8 Value 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Terminal and controller must have matching baud rate PRINT request PR BD2 PRINT response 48007 LET request LE BD2 9600 LET response parameters are changed Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications BD4 RS 422 Baud Rate Purpose Use Remarks Examples
96. 55 0905m7 Er DET eez fe mezenn 53 n 0 ro Roe Turn the knob to move the selection box to the field you want to change Push in on the knob to open the selection field Turn the knob to scroll through the list of selections until you find your choice Push in on the knob to enter your selection 3ectzxt hnou 33 Gool mo 6G D E e 0 M Ki H Kl Leo Ors cow a DI xn KK Dgooouwuntur 3269595r z0e 5 D Oc Qvu57900020 XD or oy 33 33 nD 25 Pt tu DE See 4 10 KA075771 001 DiMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL UNit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 5 Selecting Parameters in Configuration Windows Turn the knob to move the selection box to the field you want to change Push on the knob A window opens to prompt you for further selections BnigInoi W Turn the knob to move the selection box in the window to the field you want to change F LOPE 15 54 47 CONF E Loob NMum LoobNmO1 ie ee Push on the knob here then turn the knob to scroll Push on the knob A second smaller window may open to prompt you for through the further selections selections for Vsource Turn the knob to select E or End and then Push on the knob un 3 M Ma op to exit here to change the Input Filter time constant 5114 KA075771 001 4 11 Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 6 Windows Update to Prompt You for New Information as
97. 60 LET request LE P1 3 2 100 7 LET response P2 Programmer Profile 2 Values B 52 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To view or change the second profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P2 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P2 P X where P is programmer number and X is the second setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 2 will have if loop 2 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P2 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P2 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P2 3 2 100 7 LET response P3 Programmer Profile 3 Values Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the third profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P3 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P3 P X where P is programmer number and X is the third setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 3 will have i
98. A 18 KA075771 001 DiMENSION Il SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL LpMode Loop OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Use Selections Remarks To access control loop mode LOOP_ screen Auto or Manual Select Auto for closed loop control On the LOOP__ displays this will open a window LpPgNmbr Loop Programmer Number Use Selections Remarks To select the control loop and setpoint programmer number to which macro key definitions will be made UNIT CNF screen Macroky1 and Macroky2 LoopNm01 LoopNm08 See Macroky M OutSrc Manual Output Source Use Selections Remarks This field is used to select the source for the manual output CONF LOP screen Operator and Remote If operator is selected as the manual output source then the manual output is determined by the value entered by the user in the LOOP 1 screen under the reverse output or the direct output entries If remote is selected then the manual output is determined by an analog input or a loop output One use of setting the manual output source to another loops output would be to use two different sensors for one control loop A high PV alarm could be set to transfer loop one from auto to manual and a low PV alarm to transfer loop two from manual to auto When loop one is in manual the control output comes form loop two and when loop one is in auto the control output comes from loop one Note that if Output Lx is selected for the remote source
99. ANUAL GLOSSARY Reset Windup Excessive AUTO RESET action which can result from operation outside of the proportional band during automatic control All Research Inc controllers have an anti reset windup feature Retransmit An analog signal from a process controller that represents a process characteristic The Dimension II can provide three types of RETRANSMIT signals setpoint process variable and deviation See also ANALOG OUT PUT SETPOINT PROCESS VARIABLE and DEVIATION Reverse Acting Control A control arrangement in which the process controller output increases if the process variable drops below the setpoint Typically used to control heating equipment See Direct Acting Control and Bi Modal Control RS 232 Acronym which stands for Report Standard 232 This report was developed by the EIA Electronics Industry Association and provides a hardware inter face standard for digital communications See also RS 422 and RS 423 RS 422 Acronym which stands for Report Standard 422 This report was developed by the EIA Electronics Industry Association and provides a hardware inter face standard for digital communications See also RS 232 and RS 423 RTD Acronym for Resistance Temperature Detector An RTD is a sensor whose resistance varies according to the RTD s temperature When an excitation current is applied to an RTD the voltage drop across the RTD indicates the RTD temperature RTS Abbreviatio
100. CSZ Dimension Il Series 8705 Multi Loop Process Controller User s Manual November 1994 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Table of Section 1 Introducing CSZ Dimension II Contents What is CSZ Dimension ll CSZ Dimension ll Conventions sessse PE nilo rr How to Get TAS er MNT Section 2 Universal Operator Interface Introduction ssi ce tree s c prede 2 2 Front Panel Controls 2 2 Help MENT 2 2 Diamond Key Four way Keypad ssesssseess 2 3 Multi Function Knabe 2 4 Macro Keys cemere ebd Ga Bee GER d idus 2 5 Memory Card Slot e eti ets da tit etd bed ades 2 6 Screen Display Format 2 6 Graphic Icons and Screen Display Groups Menu Tree 2 7 CSZ Operation Icons and Screen Displays 2 8 CSZ Default Screen eonna eiia 2 9 CSZ Function Window Entering Unit 2 9 EISEN esce a se arai Mets Mis 2 9 Product Limit Gcreen 2 10 Function Window Entering Unit Functions 2 10 Chamber Gcreen E 2 11 Stage 1 Sereen EE 2 12 Stage 2 EEN 2 13 Analog Out Screen TEEN 2 14 15 Digital Out Screen 2 14 15 Timing Sereen iactis et DER nee Dt ie dran 2 15 Analog Iri Sereen eerte tent oerte eee ENEE 2 16 Digital In Gcreen aen hn aa aa aaeh 2 17 Ee 2 18 Alarm Acknowledge Screen ooenniiieeesseerenrrnn 2 18 19 Alarm Setup Screen 0 cccccccccccceessssssseeeeeeeceeee
101. Communication is always initiated by the computer at no time can Dimension II transmit unless the host computer requests data to be transmitted TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Software Driver When using a host computer in the network mode a software driver must be running on the host computer The following topics explain how the protocol operates and this information can be used to write a software communications driver for a host computer Host software products are also available from Research Inc Setting Up the Network Mode Set up Dimension II network mode as follows 1 With the unit in the FULL access mode use the diamond key to access the Communications Configuration screen shown in Fig B 6 2 Use the diamond key to select the 232 Port Configuration screen for RS 232 communications or 422 Port Configuration screen for RS 422 communications Use the knob to select the PROTOCOL field Select NETWORK mode error checking used Use the knob to select the NET ADDR field Select a network address number 01 99 for the controller This address is used only with NETWORK selected and must be unique oO Dm D 7 Set other variables on the Communications Setup screen to match the configuration of the host computer Note that X ON OFF Handshke and ECHO have no effect in the network mode 8 With the controller set for WARMSTRT remove AC powe
102. Configuration Screen The Loop Glossary Configuration screen can be used to change the tag names used on Loop displays When a loop number is selected on this screen the parameters shown in Fig 4 13 are displayed for the selected loop The tag names for process variable setpoint reverse output direct output output and loop mode can be modified Fig 4 13 Loop Glossary Configuration Screen CSTARTI STOP Input Output Glossary Configuration Screen Refer to Fig 4 14 The Input Output Glossary Configuration screen is used to change the tag names used for I O Tag names can be modified for contact inputs and outputs contact I O on off states and analog inputs and outputs One of four sets of on off state terminology on off open closed true false run stop can be assigned to each contact I O on the Logic Display Configura tion screen Fig 4 14 Input Output Glossary Configuration Screen CSTARTI ETOF KA075771 001 4 21 Unit CONFIGURATION DiMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Process Configuration 4 22 Setpoint Programmer Configuration Refer to Fig 4 15 The Programmer Configuration screen is used to Configure setpoint programmer parameters as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Programmer Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 15 Use the knob to move the PROGRAMMER NUMBER field Select the programmer you wish to configure 1 8 The system will display the selected p
103. Display Screen As shown in Fig 3 15 the X Y graph Loop display features an X Y graph on the upper half of the screen The vertical axis has user definable limits with the limits displayed above and below the axis The variable tag name is d Bu gie E ES displayed vertically to the left of the gt vertical axis The horizontal time DutPutai pu S 36 i scale also features user definable LoMocdaai Manual limits CSTARTI CSTOP The graph displays a history of loop performance with up to 100 samples of process data displayed The value of the reference mark and the units of the X and Y axes are displayed above the graph For example the units can be displayed as C versus minutes By moving the selector box to the REF numeric field at the top of the graphic display and pressing ENTER a horizontal reference mark can be displayed and moved along the Y axis by turning the multi function knob As the refer ence mark moved up CW or down CFW on the graph the precise value in the REF field changes accordingly The graph itself can consists of a selected process variable and if selected the associated setpoint versus time This screen also displays up to three lines of user selected text below the graph as well as the following field LPMODEO1 Loop setup window access to loop setup and auto turning functions User accessible See the Loop Control section following the Loop Display screen sections fo
104. E RS 422 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS PORT RECEIVE RECEIVE TRANSMIT TRANSMIT 1 2 3 4 5 SHIELD OR IEEE 488 RS 232 COMMUNICATIONS PORT 1 RECEIVE 2 TRANSMIT 3 COMMON HUMIDITY SENSOR EXCITATION AC MAINS 15 GND RES AC GROUND AC NEUTRAL AC HIGH NOTE ALL CONNECTIONS ARE MADE WITH PLUG IN STYLE CONNECTORS Model 8705 Operator Interface Model 8705 Control Cage 2 7 x 6 375 x 8 875 69 mm x 162 mm x 225 mm 2 2 pounds 1 kilogram 0 C to 60 C 32 F to 140 F 25 C to 85 C 13 F to 185 F 0 to 90 percent non condensing 6 75 x 6 06 x 2 27 173 mm x 155 mm x 58 mm 2 0 pounds 0 9 kilograms 0 C to 50 C 32 F to 122 F 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F 10 to 90 percent non condensing r 1 Ol Process Manager CPU 1 4 Loops 0 4 Programmers e Displays I O Process Control Information Configurations and Options e Ls E Input Output Processor Box 1 6 Analog Inputs e 1 4 Analog Outputs 2 Digital I O or Expansion Serial Port to Digital I O Controller s e RS 232 and RS 422 or IEEE 488 ANALOG INPUTS ANALOG GROUND ANALOG POWER METIDO EE SEN I I I I l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I L Digital UO Expansion 1 2 Base Controllers 4 Inputs 4 Outputs e 1 2 Expansion Racks 4 Inputs 1 2 Expansion Racks with 4 SSR Outputs or 1 2 Expansion Racks w
105. ENSION II CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Universal Operator Section 2 Interface alt rela tee MEER 2 2 Front Panel Controls 2 2 Help Key igo E eege A 2 2 Diamond Key Four way Keypad aieeeeeeeeeeeseerrnna 2 3 Multi Function Knob sssssssssssse 2 4 Macro Keys coto nbi cites edt t M deed unis 2 5 Memory Card Slot eite here bees rre Ead 2 6 Screen Display Format 2 6 Graphic Icons and Screen Display Groups Menu Tree 2 7 CSZ Operation Icons and Screen Displays 2 8 CSZ Default Screen naa si eo etvel iuh Vv as Erden apicis 2 9 CSZ Function Window Entering Unit 2 9 FUNGON HE 2 9 Product Limit Screen eese 2 10 Function Window Entering Unit Functions 2 10 Chamber Screen sivacetits eere beet dentin eaten 2 11 Stage 1 Gcreen RENE 2 12 Stage 2 Sereen EE 2 13 Analog Out Screen gegen eet d EN 2 14 15 Digital Out Gcreen cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseaeeens 2 14 15 Timing SCRE EEN 2 15 Analog In Screen cccecceeseeeeeeseeteeeeseneeeeeesesnaeaeeneeeee 2 16 Digital Im Sereen oo Ie Dese tto a iate Eee tes 2 17 Alarms eege du plut adegit c Eu stc 2 18 Alarm Acknowledge Screen oseeneseeniieesoeennrnen 2 18 19 Alarm Setup Screen 0 cccceesssesssssssteseeseeeeseeeeeees 2 20 Loop Alarm Screen cc
106. ET format LE AK X A where X is a loop or input number Field length 8 If desired use alarm status AS to view current alarms for a loop or input alarm status LAS to view alarms for an analog input AK X will acknowledge all alarms for loop X and input X at the same time If there is no loop X then only alarms for input X will be acknowledged The quotation marks should contain A or ALL although any characters will be accepted There is no way to acknowledge some alarms for a loop and not others LET request LE AK 1 A for loop 1 and input 1 LET response ET request LE AK 12 A for input 12 T response To view or change the titles of Alarm Display screens STAG format PR AL S where S is alarm screen number CTAG format LE AL S 7 X where S is alarm screen number X is screen title Field length 8 Default screen titles include LOOP_ALM ALM SET INP ALM INP_ALM2 STAG request STAG AL 1 STAG response LOOP_ALM CTAG request CTAG AL 1 ALM1 CTAG response ANnAAN ALL All Input Range Names Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To view all input ranges supported by an analog card PRINT format PR ALL A where A is analog card number 1 2 or 3 Field length Variable This command lists in a string all input ranges supported by the analog card PRINT request PR ALL 2 PRINT response RANGE NAME RANGE NAME RANGE NAME B 27 Dimension
107. Enb to Disable This will disable cold junction com pensation with thermocouple ranges allowing for recalibration without concern for the cold junction millivoltage offset Set the calibration source to a signal simulating the low end of the input range Adjust the Zero setting on the Dimension Set the calibration source to a signal simulating the high end of the input range Adjust the Span setting on the Dimension Set ColdJncEnbl to Enable Measure the cold junction temperature at the analog input connector and adjust the CldJncErr setting until the ColdJunc reading matches the measured temperature The Zero and Span parameters in the Calibrate window are NOT the same as the Lin Span and Lin Zero parameters in the Configure window Zero sets the calibration for the low end of the input range Span sets the calibration for the high end of the input range Anigin displays the actual input level of the selected input ColdJunc is the cold junction temperature in C This parameter always reads in C even if the thermocouple is set up to read in Fahrenheit It measures the temperature at the connector where the thermocouple wires and connector pins make contact This junction then is compensated for in the temperature calculation CldJncErr is the Cold Junction Error parameter in C This is added to the ColdJunc temperature in order to compensate for error in the cold junction sensor This parameter is adjusted plus or minu
108. G format CTAG PG S X where S is programmer screen number X is screen title Field length 8 Default screen titles include PROGRUN1 through PROGRUNB STAG request STAG PG 1 STAG response PROGRUN 1 CTAG request CTAG PG 1 2 PGM1 CTAG response To display or change the PID parameters for a specific loop and specific group number PRINT format PR PID L G where L is loop G is group LET format LE PID L G X Y Z where L is loop G is group and X Y and Z are gain reset and rate respectively Field length 26 Each control loop has five different groups of PID parameters 1 5 If a loop has dual PID Type PT Group 1 is always the reverse acting PID parameters and Group 2 is always the direct acting PID parameters If a loop has single PID Type then Group 1 is used no matter whether reverse or direct acting If the PID Type is programmed then all 5 groups may be used de pending on the current programmer segment PRINT request PR PID 1 1 PRINT response 1 00 0 00 0 00 LET request LE PID 1 2 3 5 2 5 5 LET response PS Programmer Mode Status Purpose Use Remarks B 56 To monitor or change the programmer s mode of operation This system variable can start or hold a programmer PRINT format PR PS P where P is programmer number LET format LE PS P X where P is programmer number and X is R S or H Field length 8 The programme
109. II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ALT Alarm Latch Purpose Use Remarks Examples AO Analog Output Purpose Use Remarks Examples AS Alarm Status Purpose Use Remarks Examples B 28 To view or change whether an alarm condition for a given alarm will be latched or unlatched when an alarm occurs Setting applies to both high and low alarms PRINT format PR ALT L where L is loop number LET format LE ALT L A B C D where A is Hi Hi amp Lo Lo PV alarm latch unlatch value B is Hi amp Lo PV alarm latch unlatch value C is Hi Hi amp Lo Lo Deviation alarm latch unlatch value D is Hi amp Lo Deviation alarm latch unlatch value Field length 35 Value Latch Unlatch Alarm condition latched Latch Alarm condition unlatched Unlatch All four values must be specified in a LET command PRINT request PR ALT 1 PRINT response Latch Letch Unigtch Unleteh LET request LE ALT 1 2 Unlatch Latch LET response LE ALT L Latch Latch Unlatch Unlatch AnA Unlatch Unlatch To view or change the value of an analog output PRINT format PR AO O where O is output number Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X 0 to 100 percent Default value is 0 percent PRINT request DR AO 1 PRINT response 25 0 Read only parameter PRINT format PR AS L where L is loop number Field length 8 Will always return one of the foll
110. L 69 3 DOF BU SETPHTO1 0 0 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Vertical Bar Graph Overview Displays Vertical bar graph Overview displays can be user defined as two three or four bar graphs Vertical bar graph configurations include TWO BAR GRAPH On the two bar graph the vertical axis displays tick marks The variable tag name is displayed to the left of the vertical axis of each bar and numeric values are displayed in large characters to the right Two lines of user selectable text can be displayed to the right Fig 2 32 THREE BAR GRAPH The three bar graph displays three labeled bar graphs numeric values below each graph and one line of user selectable text Fig 2 33 FOUR BAR GRAPH The four bar graph display is identical to the three bar graph except that four bars with no user selectable text are displayed Fig 2 34 Fig 2 32 Vertical Bar Graph Overview Display ProacUrBgi dot UE dat B Huto CSTARTI STOF P 5 R E 0 T E P y h R T i 1 D D G F F Fig 2 33 Fig 2 34 Vertical Three Bar Graph Overview Display Vertical Four Bar Graph Overview Display malake Lk cx nm uu al hm BSS Sm BP sc ac BS mE BS o Del E ECK 237 4 BT 60 Hnisin 1 69 9 CSTARTI STOF EI amam ami a b EI kel TI Hein 2 37 CSZ Dimension ll User s MaNnuac UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Mixed Numeric Text Overview Displays Refer to
111. LET request LE GN 2 2 1 00 LET response HH2 RS 232 Hardware Handshaking Purpose To view or change the hardware handshaking mode on off used during RS 232 communications Use PRINT format PR HH2 LET format LE HH2 X where X is handshaking mode Field length 8 Value Enable Disable Remarks Hardware handshaking on Enable Hardware handshaking off Disable Examples PRINT request PR HH2 PRINT response Disable LET request LE HH2 Enable LET response An Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed Purpose To view or change the hardware handshaking mode on off used during RS 422 communications Use PRINT format PR HH4 LET format LE HH4 X where X is handshaking mode Field length 8 Value Enable Disable Remarks Hardware handshaking on Enable Hardware handshaking off Disable Examples PRINT request PR HH4 PRINT response Disable LET request LE HH4 Enable LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed Tnnut Hiah Alarm Purpose To view or change the input high alarm limit for an analog input B 42 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Use PRINT format PR IH I where is analog input number LET format LE IH I 7 X whe
112. MM SS or DD HH MM A between DD and HH instead of a indicates days field in effect Displays time in hours minutes seconds 24 hour time format or days hours minutes format if remaining time exceeds 24 hours If end of program can t be found or if nested program recycles are present will display XX XX XX PRINT request PR TLP 1 PRINT response 00 09 13 TP Time into Program Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor the amount of time the current program has been running PRINT format PR TP P where P is programmer Field length 8 Value HH MM SS or DD HH MM This variable displays how long a program has been running The DD HH MM format is used only when a program has been running longer than one day PRINT request PR TP 1 PRINT response 01 30 23 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL TS Tuning Status Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To view the status of or initiate or abort loop auto tuning PRINT format PR TS L where L is loop number LET format LE TS L x where L is loop x is status Field length 8 Value Start Abort If status is Start auto tuning is not in progress and a command of LE TS L S will start it If status is Abort auto tuning is in progress and command of LE TS L A will abort it PRINT request PR TS 1 PRINT response Start LET request LE TS 1 A LET response
113. Mnemonic Engineering Unit s Mnemonic Use To display the current engineering units mnemonic Selection INPUTS screen Remarks This parameter will read either F or C for all thermocouples and RTD s depending on the status of the Eng Units field If a linear input type is selected the three character field mnemonic can be user configured see SelcFunc Net Addr Network Address Use To select the network address of serial communications Selection 232 PORT or422 PORT screen 1 99 Remarks The selection identifies the address of this unit on a communications network Each unit on the same network must have a unique address Next Seg Next Segment Use To select the segment to be executed after the currently accessed segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 1 255 Remarks Any segment including the currently accessed segment may be selected If the currently accessed segment is selected a program end will be indicated and programmer operation will be halted at this point A 20 KA075771 001 DIMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL NumLgscr Number of Logic Display Screens Ei Use Selection Remarks Off Backlighting Off Use Selection Remarks OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY To select the number of Logic screens DCON_LOG screen 1 to 4 The number of logic screens that will be displayed are entered here A mini mum of 1 to a maximum of 4 screens are allowed This inf
114. Number of Segments Purpose Use Remarks Examples OA Output Action Purpose B 50 To monitor the number of segments in a controller PRINT format PR NS P where P is programmer Field length 3 Value XXX Dimension II controllers have a single table of 256 segments which are shared by all programmers This parameter returns the same number no matter what P is This returns 750 if the Extended Segments Option is present PRINT request PR NS 1 PRINT response 256 To view or change the output action of a loop output for auto tuning TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Use Remarks Examples OC Output Change Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PRINT format PR OA L where L is loop number LET format LE OA L X where X is output action type Field length 8 Value Reverse Direct Output action types Reverse Direct PRINT request PR OA 1 PRINT response Direct LET request LE OA 1 Reverse LET response Used for auto tuning To view or change an analog output value PRINT format PR OC L where L is loop number LET format LE OC L 2 X where L is loop number and X is output change Field length 8 Value 0 0 to 100 0 percent To change an output value type the percentage by which you wish to increase bump the output The example below reflects an output increase from 5 to 15 percent PRINT request P
115. OPStrt04 selections correspond with starting a programmer through the Operator Interface When OPStart is set to OPStrt01 the program mer can be started when the Start_Prgr parameter set to start This parameter can be found on the PROGRUN screen in the StrtPgr1 window OR NOR AND NAND selections correspond with Starting a programmer through a logic function RemCI 1 8 selections correspond with starting a programmer through a contact input This would allow an abort to start from a remote location If all four programmers Operator start sources were selected to be the same then all four programmers would start when the appropriate source became true There are three different ways to start a programmer One is through an operator start another is through a remote start and the third is via a time of day start Each of these has a user defined starting segment Both the operator start and remote start can be initiated through the operator interface or a contact input or through a logic function The only difference between these starts is where on the operator interface the start sequence is initiated The operator start is found on the PROGRUN screen under the StrtPgr1 win dow The remote start is found on the PROGRUN screen under toe PgOption window Out Off Control Outputs Off Use Selections Remarks To make internal logic assignments that will cause all control loop outputs to turn off CONF ALM screen OFFSet01 OFF
116. P m mni TO c H R H L D C n 2 3 CO ceo DD Du oo 2 13 UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Output Screens 2 14 CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL There are two different types of outputs being displayed on the output screens These screens are informational only and give the operator or serviceman indication as to what is being outputted from the controller Analog Out Screen The Analog Out Screen displays the values of the four analog outputs Fig 2 11 Note These outputs are also available as events Standard options will use these outputs These outputs can be config ured as 0 20mA 0 5V or 0 5v time proportioned A relay board can be added to allow 120v to be switched by these outputs Digital Out Screen The Digital Out Screen displays the status of the contact outputs Fig 2 12 FANS COMPR_ 1 HEATER COOLING BY PASS COMPR_ 2 HUM_COMP RH_COOL Indicates the status of the output that controls the air circulator fans Indicates the status of the output that controls the Stage 1 compressor Indicates the status of the output that controls the heating control relay Indicates the status of the output that controls the cooling solenoid Indicates the status of the output that controls the by pass solenoid Indicates the status of the output that controls the stage 2 compressor Indicates the status of the output that controls the humidify air compres sor
117. PID group for control loop Selections PROGRUN or LOOP__ screens None Remarks One of the five PID groups is active at all times see PID_Type PID Grp PID Group Use To select the PID group to which the calculated PID parameters will be trans ferred Selections LOOP 3 screen LpMode 1 5 Remarks SeePID Type PID Type PID Type Use To select the type and number of PID groups to be used by this control loop Selections CONF LOP screens Single Dual Progmmed and SelAdapt Remarks Single uses one set of PID values group 1 Dual uses two sets of PID values group 1 and group 2 Group 1 is active for a reverse acting output value and group 2 is active for a direct acting output value This is normally used with bimodal control see Cntl Act Progmmed uses up to five sets of PID values in conjunction with the setpoint programmer When a setpoint program is devel oped PID groups can be selected on a per segment basis SelAdapt uses up to five sets of PID values in conjunction with the process variable input value Break points are entered to identify regions for which a set of PID values will be active When process input is between breakpoints the PID values are interpolated Power DN Power Down Time and Date Use To display time and date of the last time the unit was powered down Selection Unit screen Remarks None Power UP Power Up Time and Date Use To display time and date of the last time the unit w
118. Programmers e Displays I O Process Control Information Configurations and Options es engl Input Output Processor Box 1 6 Analog Inputs 1 4 Analog Outputs ANALOG Ge 2 Digital VO or Expansion Serial GROUND E Kl UUMIDITY sendor Port to Digital l O Controller s e RS 232 and RS 422 or IEEE 488 ANALOG 2 Bs EXCITATION OUTPUTS SER ANALOG I I I i I I I I i I I I I INPUTS i RS 232 I Ie I I DIGITAL I VO OR E COMMUNICATIONS JJ ER nem I I I I I I I I I I I I I I l I l I I l L Se Single Stage Machine Control Board a 6 Contact Outputs J D E 1 Watch Dog Output pe a CONTROL BOARD puts 1 Temperature Input Dual Stage Machine Control Board 12 Contact Outputs 1 Watch Dog Output 8 Contact Inputs 4 Pressure Sensor Inputs 2 Temperature Input ON INC ANALOG INPUTS INPUT 1 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 6 FOUR ANALOG OUTPUTS OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 4 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 4 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CLK CLK DATA DATA Figure 1 Typical Rear View Specifications Dimensions Overall WxHxD Environmental Limits Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity REMOTE OPERATOR INTERFAC
119. R CM 1 PRINT response 2 LET request LE CM 1 3 LET response To view the state of a contact output PRINT format PR CO C where C is the contact output number Field length 8 Value Tag name from one of the four possible sets of on off labels for contacts Each Dimension II controller has four pairs of on off labels Each contact input or output can be configured to use one of these four sets of labels So the four pairs might be On Off Open Closed True False and Run Stop and the user can assign contact output 2 to read Open or Closed The CO parameter returns the state of the contact output using the labels chosen for the particular contact PRINT request PR CO 2 PRINT response Off To view the gain calculated by the auto tuning function PRINT format PR CP L where L is loop number Field length 8 Displays the gain that will be used if auto tuning values are accepted PRINT request PR CP 1 PRINT response 1 00 CPG Current PID Group Purpose Use Remarks Examples CRS Calculated Reset Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the currently active PID group for a loop PRINT format PR CPG L where L is loop number Field length 8 Value 1 5 Displays the number of the PID group currently being used PRINT request PR CPG 1 PRINT response 2 To view the reset calculated by the auto tuning function PRINT forma
120. R OC 1 PRINT response 5 00 LET request LE OC 1 10 LET response OLS Analog Output Linear Span Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the span for a linear analog output determined during calibration PRINT format PR OLS O where O is output number LET format LE OLS O X where O is loop number X is span value Field length 8 Value XXXX XXX 0 0 to 100 0 percent This number defaults to 100 percent PRINT request PR OLS 1 PRINT response 100 000 LET request LE OLS 1 99 500 LET response OLZ Analog Output Linear Zero Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To view or change the zero value for a linear analog output determined during calibration PRINT format PR OLZ O where O is output number LET format LE OLZ O 7 X where O is output number X is zero value Field length 8 Value XXXX XXX This number defaults to zero percent PRINT request PR OLZ 1 PRINT response 0 000 B 51 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS OT Output Purpose Use Remarks Examples LET request LE OLZ 1 1 400 LET response To view or change the output of a loop PRINT format PR OT L where L is loop number LET format LE OT L X where X is output value Field length 8 Value 100 0 to 100 0 percent Range is from 100 to 100 percent where 100 is full reverse out and 100 is full
121. READ and push the knob The READ command transfers data from the memory card to the Dimension Controller Step 5 To write or save a file turn the knob moving the cursor box to select WRITE and push the knob The write protect switch must be set to NO on the memory card Tum the knob to select the file to be saved then change the name if desired by pushing the knob and tuming to enter a name A window will appear to initiate the write command or exit turn the knob right moving the cursor box to write and press to make the selection A message will appear when the write command is completed Turn the knob right moving cursor box to Close Wn and press Other information The memory card closely resembles the floppy disk of a computer However the memory card is a single sided device that contains RAM memory and a battery backup Both 16K and 32K cards are available To write protect your memory card use the switch in the lower right corner of the card to select YES to write protect Files can be deleted or the memory card can be formatted toremove all data In both casesthe data will be destroyed The memory card uses a 3 volt lithium battery with a shelf life of five years Replacement batteries are available The part number is 079379 001 If the battery is running low a message will appear when you use the memory card Files types Recipes A program or group of segments Mem Img Memory image setup and configuration DspConf Di
122. Reverse Output Low Limit R W L LP Time into Program R P RO Reverse Output in percent R W L TS Tuning Status R W L RS Reset R W L TXP Analog Input Type RW RSD Response Speed R W L UT Engineering Units Type RWI RSS Remote Start Segment R W P Access Code Legend R Read I Input Subscript W Write P Programmer Subscript T Tagnames Only O Output Subscript S Screen Subscript C Contact Subscript L Loop Subscript Miscellaneous Subscript B 22 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To monitor the channel 2 setpoint and process variable tagnames STAG SP 2 PV 2 e To monitor the first macro key title STAG MC 1 Response Message to a STAG Command When the response message is replying to a STAG command either a data message or an error message follows the station address There are no spaces in a response message except those in cluded in the system variable tagname or the error message Each response message contains the tagnames requested with no separators and each tagname has a length of 8 characters The following examples are the responses to the command examples above e Command STAG PV 1 Response ProcVrO1 Command STAG SP 2 PV 2 Response SetPntO2ProcVr02 e Command STAG MC1 Response START where one space STAG Request Error Messages An error message indicates that the STAG request message was unsuccessful The err
123. Screen Alm Grei PID Greil Evnts _ _ 3 4 Datt Zon Enter PaBu ild CSZ Dimension I User s MaNUAL Program Options When PcoPTION is selected at the Program Run screen a window permitting time day program start initiation is displayed Fast forward abort and remote input start functions can also be selected in this window At the Program Run screen Fig 3 3 you may call up a window Fig 3 4 to configure programmer start abort functions Select PcoPTION to configure the following parameters TODStrt1 Enter time of day to start programmer DOWStrt1 Enter day of week to start programmer TOD Sseg Select the starting segment for the programmer to start at for a Time of Day start TODSEn01 Enable disable programmer TOD DOW start PgFFwd01 Enable disable programmer fast forward function Abort01 Enable to go to segment O abort Disable to resume recipe Rm Sseg Select the starting segment for the programmer to start at if remote start is used to start a programmer RmStrt01 Initiates programmer start at the remote starting segment SpBias01 Select bias value to be added to all profile setpoints for programmer Timebase Programmer update rate in hours minutes seconds or min utes seconds tenths of seconds Sets the value only for the programmer you have selected Fig 3 4 Program Option Window CSTARTI STOF CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Building a Setpoint Pr
124. Set08 Opens a window that allows selecting up to four alarm conditions and contact inputs that will cause all control outputs to turn off Output 8 Control Loop Output OvScreen Overview Display Screen EN A 22 Use Selection Remarks Use Selections Remarks To display the control loop output value None Displays both the reverse and direct output levels Direct is displayed as 0 to 100 and reverse is displayed as 0 to 10096 This field is only changable when the control loop is in manual mode see LpMode To select an overview screen for display configuration DCON OVR screen OVScreen OVIEW__1 to OVIEW 9 The number of overview screens selectable will be limited by the entry TotalOvr which is the number of Overview screens that will be displayed The present display configuration of the selected screen will be displayed in the entry Format KA075771 001 DiMENSION ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY PgBuild Programmer Build Use Opens window to define program parameters Selection PROGRUN screen PgBuild Remarks Provides access to build setpoint programs PgFFwd Program Fast Forward Use To enable program fast forward Selections PROGRUN PgOption Enable Disable Remarks When enabled the program will execute at the speed set by WarpFctr PgMode Programmer Mode Use Tagname to select Programmer Mode Selections OVIEW or PROGRUN
125. Start R W P P5 Programmer Profile 5 value R W P DT Date RW P6 Programmer Profile 6 value RW P DV Deviation RL P7 Programmer Profile 7 value R W P EO2 RS 232 Echo Mode RW P8 Programmer Profile 8 value R W P POL RS 422 Echo Mode RW PDD Power Down Date R TA088002 001 B 21 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Table B 4 System Variables Con t Code Title Access Code Title Access PDT Power Down Time R RT Rate RW L PG Programmer Screen Titles RW LS SA Setpoint Adjust RW PID PID Group R W SB2 RS 232 Stop Bits R W PS Programmer Mode Status R W P SB4 RS 422 Stop Bits RW PS1 Programmer Start R W P SC Scale R W L Segment 1 Remote Start SG Segment Data R W PS2 Programmer Start R W P SMD System Mode RW Segment 2 Unused SP Setpoint R W L PS3 Programmer Start R W P SPS Setpoint Source R W L Segment 3 TOD Start SR Sampling Rate R W L PS4 Programmer Start R W P SS System Status RW Segment 4 Operator Start SY System Screen Title R W T PT PID Type R W L TCY Time Proportioning Cycle Time R W C PUD Power Up Date R TD Time of Day TOD R W PUT Power Up Time R TDD Tuning Complete RL PV Process Variable RL TDS Time of Day Start R W P QS2 RS 232 XON XOFF Mode R W TEN Tuning Error Number RL QS4 RS 422 XON XOFF Mode R W TER Tuning Error RL RH Reverse Output High Limit R W L TL Time Left in Segment SEGtime R P RI Recipe Image R W TLP Time Left in Program R P RL
126. T 1 2 Unlatch LET response LG Logic Screen Titles Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the titles of Logic Display screens STAG format STAG LG S where S is a logic screen number CTAG format CTAG LG S X where S is logic screen number X is screen title Field length 8 Default screen titles include LOGIC 1 through LOGIC 8 STAG request STAG LG 1 STAG response LOGIC ___1 CTAG request CTAG LG 1 LOG1 CTAG response LND Linear Analog Input Decimal Position Purpose B 44 To view or change the decimal position for a linear analog input TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Use PRINT format PR LND I where is analog input number LET format LE LND I 7 X where is analog input number X is number representing decimal position Field length 1 Value decimal position 1 5 Remarks This variable can be changed only for linear analog inputs Examples PRINT request PR LND 1 PRINT response 5 LET request LE LND 1 2 LET response LNS Linear Analog Input Span Purpose To view or change the span for a linear analog input determined during cali bration Use PRINT format PR LNS I where is analog input number LET format LE LNS I 7 X where is analog input number X is span value Field length 8 Value 0 to 100 percent Remarks This number defaults to 100 percent Examples PRINT r
127. T response 04 NAO Number of Analog Outputs Purpose To view the number of analog outputs used by the controller Use PRINT format PR NAO B 48 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Field length 2 Value See remarks Dimension II accommodates up to four analog outputs per card with a maxi mum of three cards per controller PRINT request PR NAO PRINT response 04 NCI Number of Contact Inputs Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the number of contact inputs used by the controller PRINT format PR NCI Field length 2 Value See remarks Dimension II can have both local and remote contacts This variable returns the total number of them configured as contact inputs PRINT request PR NCI PRINT response 08 NCO Number of Contact Outputs Purpose Use Remarks Examples NL Number of Loops Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the number of contact outputs used by the controller PRINT format PR NCO Field length 2 Value See remarks Dimension II can have both local and remote contacts This variable returns the total number of them configured as contact outputs PRINT request PR NCO PRINT response 04 To monitor the number of loops in a controller PRINT format PR NL Field length 2 Dimension II units have 1 8 PID control loops PRINT request PR NL PRINT respo
128. TERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY DELETE deletes a selected FILE from the memory card The default file name determines what is stored in the file The status message Writing appears when a file is being written the Mem Img file is long and takes about a minute and a half to write Recipes this file type stores all program segment information for all 256 segments SysConf this file stores communication parameters set on the COMM screen Mem Img this file stores all system configuration settings calibration settings and tagnames DspConf this file stores all changes to display configuration for the OVERVIEW LOOP and LOGIC screens Macroky this file stores the Macro Keys programs FwdEnSrc Programmer Fast Forward Enable Source Use Selections Remarks This is used to select the action to enable program fast forward CONF PRG OperFF 1 OperFF A RemCl1 8 OR set 1 4 NORset 1 4 ANDset 1 4 NANDset 1 4 The OperFF 1 OperFF 4 selections correspond with the initiation of fast for warding through a program via the Operator Interface The selection of OperFF 1 would place the programmer in fast forward when the PgFFwd01 field in the progrun screen in the PGOption window is selected to Enable RemCl selections correspond with the initiation of the fast forward through a contact input This would allow fast forwarding through a program form a remote location OR NOR AND NAND selections correspond to internal
129. UT screen is displayed See Figure 3 and refer back to Table 1 for selections Step 3 Turn the knob right to move cursor box to Card Sel Press the knob and turn right to view selec tions Press the knob onceto enterthe selection A window will open to allow patching of loop outputs to the selected physical output The following sections of this guide will explain configuration for the board options Follow the guide for the board you have selected Time Proportioned Outputs Setup Guide a M 50 75 100 OUTPUT CYCLE TIME 0 25 Figure 1 Time Proportioned Output Relationship CSTARTI CSTOP Figure 2 Unit Configuration Screen CSTART I Figure 3 Configuration Output Screen CSTOP Time Proportion Analog Outputs on the Analog Card Step 4 The previous step will have opened a new win dow From the display window shown press the knob to allow parameter selection Rotate the knob and press to select the desired loop output to be tied to the AnaOut Choices are RevOutL for the selected loop Reverse Output or DirOut for the Direct Output Make this selec tion for each control output as required for your applica tion Afteryou have made your selections move the cursor box to the Close Wn field Press the knob to exit Move to Step 5 Time Proportion Relay Outputs on the Analog Card Step 4 The previous step will have opened a new window Press the kno
130. Y 1 PRINT response 001 LET request LE TCY 1 15 LET response TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS TD Time of Day TOD Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or set the time of day TOD clock PRINT format PR TD LET format LE TD HH MM SS Field length 8 Value HH MM SS HH hour MM minutes and SS seconds The TOD clock displays military time and increments the date every 24 hours PRINT request PR TD PRINT response 02 49 34 LET request LE TD 14 55 00 LET response TDD Tuning Complete Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the status of loop auto tuning PRINT format PR TDD L where L is loop number Field length 8 Value Yes No Yes auto tuning complete No auto tuning not complete PRINT request PR TDD 1 PRINT response No TDS Time of Day Start Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the time for the clock driven programmer time of day start PRINT format PR TDS P where P is programmer number LET format LE TDS P x where P is programmer number x is time of day Field length 8 Value HH MM SS Time is displayed or set in hours minutes seconds 24 hour format PRINT request PR TDS 1 PRINT response 04 14 12 LET request LE TDS 1 04 15 00 LET response TEN Tuning Error Number Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To
131. able or jump around This section should guide the user to correct this type or problem The Dimension uses multiplexed inputs This means the analog inputs on the same Dimension analog input card are not electrically isolated from one another A voltage between the inputs greater than the specifications allow will cause fluctuation or inaccurate process variable readings Another cause of Input fluctuation problems are due to common mode voltages exceeding specifications Common mode voltages are mea sured from the Dimension input to frame ground Sometimes it is difficult to measure this voltage accurately due to the impedance of the measuring device and characteristics of the induced electrical voltages These voltages can be caused by electromechanical interference EMI Radio frequency interference RFI or resistive coupling from an electrical heater or source to the Dimension input For example a Dimension input may pick up common mode voltages from an electrical heater through a ce ramic thermocouple as the resistance of hot ceramic is not infinite Solutions to Fluctuation Problems 1 Itis important that the Dimension Frame ground connection on the power input is used 2 Jumper the plus and minus connections of unused Dimension inputs This is particularly important with unused inputs configured as thermocouple with burnout 3 When using thermocouple inputs that are electrically floating for example a ceramic sheathe
132. address settings RAM verify error On startup indicates missing UO board Incorrect range numbers IO board not found Faulty I O connections Analog outputs are off Check for open sensor alarm condition Entered value not accepted Out of range Noise interference Incorrect setting RS 232 RS 422 Faulty connection No process variables appear on display Communications do not work Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Operator Interface Display Terminology DiMENSION ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Operator Interface Display Terminology Note A instead ofa between the screen parameterabbreviation andthe description means that this parametermay be assigned to an overviewdisplay is an abbreviation of a 2 digital numerical entry e g Alarm could be Alarm 01 Abort Programmer Abort Use Selection Remarks One of the possible actions that can be selected when defining a macro key Macro key 1 amp 2 NotActvd or Activatd Selecting Activatd will cause the programmer identified by LpPgNmbr to Abort when the macro key is pressed Selecting NotActvd disables the macro key from causing this action Abort_ Programmer Abort Enable Use Selections Remarks This field will either place the associated programmer in the abort mode or remove it from the abort mode Enable Disable Placing the progr
133. age can t attach Process Box Error 711 ADV28 Fatal Error Dead task Error 777 ADV29 Fatal Error Unknown type ADV30 ConCage Error SPI Write timeout error Error 801 ADV31 Access Not allowed FULL Access required Enter required passcode ADV32 Access Not Allowed FULL or LIMITED Access Enter required passcode required Message not available Press ENTER Fatal Error ConCage can t link to SysBB Ol CPU or Analog card Call technical service for assistance ADV33 System Error Message Not Found 5 7 Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL UNIT CONFIGURATION Troubleshooting Guide 5 8 If you encounter Dimension Il operation or communications problems we recommend that you first check your system against the troubleshooting checklist in table 5 2 If problems still exist call Dimension Il Technical Support Table 5 2 Dimension Il Troubleshooting Checklist PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Check AC power source and cable connections Check operator interface to control cage cable connection Check for low line condition Cold start or send the unit to factory as the contract brightness could have been set to 0 Battery low or dead Defective RAM memory chip EPROM verify Noise may have corrupted memory error message Defective EPROM memory chip UO board may have improper address settings IO board may not be plugged in UO board may have improper
134. ammer in abort mode causes the programmer to save the current state of the programmer and start a new program run at Segment 0 The Programmer will remain in the Abort Mode until the Abort is disabled When the Abort is disabled the programmer will restore the previous state it was in and continue running as if nothing happened AbortSrc Programmer Abort Source Use Selections This field is used to select the source for the program abort initiation CONF PRGscreen AbrtSrc1 AbrtSrc8 LGASet01 LGASet04 Conin 1 Conin 8 RemCl 1 16 NANDSet 1 4 ANDSet 1 4 OR Set 1 4 NORSet 1 4 CLC IN 1 2 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s Manuat OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks The AbrtSrci AbrtSrc8 selections correspond with the initiation of an Abort through the Operator Interface The selection of AbrtSrc1 would place the programmer in the Abort Mode when the Abort 01 field was selected to En able LGASet01 LGASet04 selections correspond with the initiation of an abort through a logic function Thus an abort could be started when an alarm condi tion occurred or an Opensensor A latched alarm would cause the programmer to remain in the Abort Mode until that alarm was acknowledged An un latched alarm would remove the programmer from abort as soon as the alarm condition cleared Conln__1 ConIn__8 selections correspond with the initiation of an abort through a contact input This would allow an abort to s
135. amount of filtering is set by entering a filter constant A filter constant of O means no filtering If Anigin01 is selected then the first analog input on analog card one is use as the KA075771 001 Dimension Il SERIEs 8700 User s MaNuAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY process variable for that loop If Analn1 2 is selected then analog input 1 is used for the PV until it burns out In that condition analog input 2 takes over If both inputs are burned out then an open sensor condition is in effect If Calc 1 is selected then the process variable is derived from the following equation PV z IN1 Mtlpler1 IN2 Mitpler2 IN3 Mitpler3 IN4 MItpler4 Scale where IN1 IN4 analog input 1 4 Mltpler1 Mitpler4 constant 1 4 Scale a constant Be sure to note decimal alignments and not to exceed the maximum values of 32767 to 32767 no decimal points If RH is selected then the process variable is a calculation of the relative humidity based on a dry bulb wet bulb criteria The Dry bulb can be any of the four analog inputs or any of the four setpoints The Wet bulb can be any of the four analog inputs The default selections are Dry bulb analog input 1 and Wet bulb analog input 2 The RH calculation also used atmospheric pressure The atmospheric pressure can be set from 0 7 to 1 2 with 1 0 7 sea level Rate__ Control Loop PID Rate Use Selection Remarks To set PID rate for control loop LOOP_
136. and RI operation parameters A user with Full Access can view the above Operation areas as well as the RI Configu ration side A diagram of this screen hierarchy is listed below in Figure 2 3 Fig 2 3 CSZ Menu Tree OPERATION SECURITY LEVELS Limited Access Full Access PROD LMT CHAMBER UNIT UNIT CNF Gei ES 2 7 UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL CSZ Operation Icons and Screen Display Groups 2 8 CSZ Default Screen and Product Hi Low Limit Screen L When a screen is first displayed after being powered up the selector box is located in the OPEN position near the bottom of the screen If you press the Help key a help window is displayed that describes how to turn the chamber on off Press the Help key again or the knob to close the help window If any items on the screen are selectable the knob can be turned CW to move the selector box to the first selectable item on the screen If the multi function knob is pressed the item is selected and one of two actions occurs A window opens for further input The selected item is displayed in inverse video and you can change the item in one of the following ways CHARACTER ENTRY Display one character at a time by turning the knob CW or CCW and press ENTER when the character you wish to select is displayed This input method displays the full ASCII alphanu meric character set as the knob is turned NUMBER ENTRY
137. and followed by a stop bit thus permitting the interval between characters to vary Automatic Control Automatic control operates on a closed loop basis i e a measured process variable is compared to the setpoint to produce a control signal This control signal adjusts the final control element to minimize deviation from setpoint KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 GLOSSARY Band A Dimension controller parameter that determines the relationship between the reverse and direct outputs for bi modal control configuration The Dimension offers three types of bi modal band relationships adjoining band overlapping band and dead band See also ADJOINING BAND OVERLAPPING BAND DEAD BAND and BI MODAL Baud Rate Rate at which bits are transmitted per second Synonymous with BPS or bits per second Bi Modal Band A parameter that determines the relationships between the reverse and direct outputs for bi modal control configurations There are three types of bi modal band relationships adjoining band overlapping band and dead band When dead band is selected only one type of output action reverse or direct can be active at a given time However dead band differs from adjoining band in that the output does not change immediately between reverse and direct Instead a dead band exists on the transition between reverse and direct control during which both outputs remain at the mini
138. and press to exit embedded window Loop number one will now receive its input from analog input one until an open sensor occurs At that time the Dimension will sense the open condition and automatically switch to the redundant input analog input number two Setup Guide LooP_Num L PUzource ntl Get PID Tupe Tune RemSPsrc Auto Man _ M_OutSreo AlarmAct Retrnsmt DCH O 23000 D 2m 855m 520 rm DIDOC2Z2r 0 ut 7575 DuUOuc STRHRT Redundant Inputs L STOP Figure 1 Loop Configuration Screen RETRANSMITTING A LOOP DEVIATION Deviation is the difference between the loop setpoint and the process variable values The control loop in auto mode will try to control to zero deviation Because we can have both positive and negative deviation the range is twice as large The retransmitted range is sourced from the analog input selection and will be in units associated with this input Example Loop 1 is a K thermocouple We would like to retransmit the deviation to a chart recorder The recorder requires a 0 5 VDC signal that represents 0 to 1000 C But deviation can be both positive and negative therefore the deviation is a 1000 to 1000 C range The output signal to the recorder is as follows Deviation 0 0V DC 1000 C deviation 2 5V DC 0 C deviation 5 0V DC 1000 C deviation Step 1 Power down the Dimension Controller and remove the analog I O board Set the jumpers for ou
139. and will override the selections made on this window Once selections are made and the control loop is setup an autotuning run can be started Autotune Setup Guide Step 2 Pressthe diamond key upto highlight the RI icon and press left to access the Operation side Press the diamond key down three times to access the Loop display LOOP 1 See Figure 2 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to LpMode01 and press the knob The first loop window will apear See Figure 3 Set LpMode01 to Manual by moving the cursor box to this entry and pressing the knob The autotuning algori thm requires the Loop Status be set to Manual Move the cursor box to the Autotune entry by turning the knob Press the knob to select This will open the autotune run window See Figure 4 The first entry on this window Autotune will be used to Start or Abort an autotuning LOOP 1 O 12 58 25 PROLYROL 23 5 poe Se 1 1 7 Dir Qut 1 6 LPhocdea1 Man Td ty tu sg Sse Ode OI OG VODO Oa GG 7000 GickrGiGlra iy CSTART Figure 3 Loop 1 Window L STOP run Once an autotuning run is started the Autotune entry will automatically change from Start to Abort Step 3 Monitor the variable Samples PVchange and _change See Figure 4 The sampling rate is based on the RespTime response time The time between samples can be estimated by RespTime 60 500 seconds The autotune algorithm is designed to take a mi
140. as powered up Selection Unit screen Remarks None A 24 KA075771 001 Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY PrBias Profile Bias Use To enter a control loop setpoint bias for loop Selection Numeric Remarks The profile bias is summed with a programmed setpoint and then used by the control loop as its setpoint This is accessed from the PGoption screen Prof XX Program Profile Use To set the value to which the programmer will ramp the setpoint in the cur rently accessed segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild Numeric Remarks This value is a setpoint for the adjoining control loop The setpoint source must be set to programmer to be in effect When the program is in hold the profile value may be manipulated by the operator Protocol Communications Protocol Use Selects the type of communications protocol Selections 232 PORT or422 PORT screens Terminal or Network Remarks Terminal protocol is used with RS 232 Network protocol is used with RS 422 and provides complete error detection and correction ProcVr Process Variable Use Tagname for Process Variable of control loop Selections OVIEW or PROGRUN screens None Remarks Displays the current process input value for a control loop This tagname can be changed on the GLOS LOP screen The tagname will be used throughout the unit ProgmrNm Programmer Number 3 Use To select a prog
141. ata to one or more external units For the Dimension II the term port refers to the hardware for a communications interface See also PORT 1 PORT 2 INTERFACE and COMMUNICATIONS Power Controller An electrical device whose output is adjusted by a control signal in order to operate a final control element The POWER CONTROLLER output is propor tional to but much larger than the control signal See also PROCESS CON TROLLER OUTPUT and FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT Power Up Response The initial action and operating state for a device when power is applied to it Two types of POWER UP RESPONSE are available for the Dimension II COLD START and WARM START See also COLD START and WARM START Process Controller A control device that automatically varies its output to maintain a process variable at a setpoint A PROCESS CONTROLLER monitors the process variable through a sensor such as a thermocouple or RTD The Dimension II contains a separate PROCESS CONTROLLER for each channel The term process controller is typically abbreviated to controller See also AUTO MATIC CONTROL CLOSED LOOP PROCESS VARIABLE SETPOINT THER MOCOUPLE and RTD KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 GLOSSARY Process Monitoring Alarm An alarm that monitors a process characteristic to identify malfunctions or to check for specific conditions The Dimension II has eleventypes of PROCESS Monitoring ALARMS f
142. ate PID parameters KA075771 001 A 33 Dimension ll SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY BUMP 1 to 100 Determines the amount of output change to a process PIDGRP 1 TO 5 Determines which PID group is to receive the calculated PID parameters FAST MEDIUM SLOW Determines the response speed of the closed loop system A FAST setting will respond to a disturbance in the system as quickly as possible with some overshoot A MEDIUM setting will have little or no overshoot but will take longer to respond A SLOW setting will have no overshoot and will take the longest to respond to the disturbance If a thermocouple is to be used that has a greater range than the capacity of the oven the Input Low Limit and Input High Limit should be set to reflect the usable range of the oven For Example if a J thermocouple is selected the low limit is 22 0 C and the High is 760 2 C If the chamber can only reach a temperature of 200 C with the output full on then the usable range is 0 to 200 C Therefore to provide the best control as possible set the Input high Limit to 200 0 C and the low limit to 0 0 C Before starting the Auto tune function the process should be stabilize at some non zero condition For example set the reverse output to 5 and let the PV stabilize TuneAct Auto Tuning Action Use Selections Remarks To select reverse or direct tuning action LpMode AutoTune SetParms Reverse D
143. atio setpoint blend factor scale factor PRINT request PR BF 1 PRINT response 5 LET request LE BF 1 6 LET response BHL CLC Basic High Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the highest acceptable value for the corresponding BNV variable PRINT format PR BHL V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BHL V X where V is variable number and X is a number Field length 8 BHL V is used to check operator input for BNV V No number higher than BHL V will be accepted for BNV V V can be any number from 1 to 32 PRINT request PR BHL 1 PRINT response 100 0 LET request LE BHL 12 2 250 LET response BLL CLC Basic Low Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To view or change the lowest acceptable value for the corresponding BNV variable PRINT format PR BLL V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BLL V X where V is variable number and X is a number Field length 8 BLL V is used to check operator input for BNV V No number lower than BLL V will be accepted for BNV V V can be any number from 1 to 32 PRINT request PR BLL 1 PRINT response 10 0 LET request LE BLL 12 0 LET response B 31 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BLV CLC Basic List Variable Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the four selec
144. b to allow parameter selection Rotatethe knob and pressto select the desired loop output tobetiedtothe TPout Choices include RevOutL forthe selected loops Reverse Output or DirOutL for the se lected loop Direct Output Make this selection for each control output as required for your application Move the cursor box to the Close_Wn field Press the knob to exit Proceed to Step 5 Time Proportion Outputs on the Contact O Card Step 4 The previous step will have opened a new window Press the knob to allow parameter selection Rotate the knob and press to select the desired loop output to be tied to the ConOut Choices are RevOutL for the selected loop Reverse Output or DirOutL for the selected loop Direct Output Make this selection for each control output as required for your application Move the cursor box to the Close_Wn field Press the knob to exit this window Step 5 After patching the loop control outputs to the de sired physical outputs in the proceeding section you must now configure the desired Cycle Time for each time proportioned output Access the Hardware Calibration icon by pressing the diamond key down Press the diamond key right to select ANA_OUTS configuration screen See Figure 4 Select the AnaOutpt that is to be configured for Time Proportioned Outputs by rotating the right and pressing to select Turn right to view selections and press to enter selection Access the CyclTime entry by turning the knob t
145. be used by the selected loop Selections Include Anlgin 01 06 The process variable will come from the selected analog input Analn 1 6 The process variable will come from the first analog input specified If this input detects an open sensor burn out thermocouple control is transferred to the second input The factory default for control loop output value is zero To change this value select AlarmAct and enter an alternate percent output default Calc 4 1 4 The process variable will be calculated by the following equation AnigInO1 Mult01 AniginO2 Mult02 Anlgin03 Mult03 AnlginO4 MultO4 scale RH1 RH2 The process variable will be a relative humidity calculation The temperatures of the dry and wet bulbs thermocouples or RTDs are compared and based on a psychometric table the relative humidity is calculated An Atmospheric Pressure setting may also be entered with sea level equaling 1 0 CLCInpt1 2 The process variable will be calculated by the optional CLC program Note Alsonotethatthe temperature setpointcan beusedin place ofthe actual dry bulb temperature measurementwhen the RH calculation is being made Thismethodprovides more stable tempera ture and RH control in some applications 4 26 FitConst Most process variable selections allow an entry for an input digital filtering value Flt Const The entry is the time constant in sec onds of a low
146. ber identifies what was wrong with the request message e g a syntax error All error messages are listed in table B 5 in this appendix LIST Commands The LIST command provides a useful help function that can be used during communications To display all parameters entries on screen that can be used with a PRINT or LET command see table B 4 type LI followed by the 2 or 3 character system variable and the channel number in parentheses The system will display all possible entries than can be used with the variable capitalized correctly and separated by commas For example to list all param eters that can be used with the Loop Status system variable type LI LS 1 and press ENTER This function works with system variables which have a finite number of possible settings STAG Commands The Tagname of a system variable is the label used on the Dimension II opera tor interface for that variable For example the default tagname for the setpoint of loop 1 is SetPnt01 So PR SP 1 would read the value of the loop 1 setpoint and STAG SP 1 would read the label used for the setpoint of loop 1 The STAG command is used to show the operator interface tagname used for a system variable The data message contains the system variable abbreviation and a subscript if applicable Multiple tagnames may be re quested in a single command The following examples show the use of the STAG command e To monitor the channel 1 process variable
147. can never be greater than the reverse output high limit RH PRINT request PR RL 1 PRINT response 75 00 LET request LE RL 1 25 LET response TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS RO Reverse Output in percent Purpose Use Remarks Examples RS Reset Purpose Use Remarks Examples RSD Response Speed Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To monitor or change the reverse output for a control loop PRINT format PR RO L where L is loop LET format LE RO L XXX X where L isloopand X is the new reverse output value Field length 8 Value XXX X 0 0 to 100 0076 The reverse output RO may be monitored displayed at any time Control outputs may be changed only when the controller is in manual mode PRINT request PR RO 1 PRINT response 15 0 LET request LE RO 1 20 LET response To monitor or change the reset integral value currently in use for a control loop PRINT format PR RS L where L is loop LET format LET RS 1 X where L isloopand X is the reset value Field length 8 Value XX XX This system variable prints or changes the actual reset value currently in use for a control loop PRINT request PR RS 1 PRINT response 1 00 LET request LE RS 1 2 00 LET response To view or change the process speed fast medium slow for which you wish to auto
148. cancels or modifies an alarm display or alarm output Also the effect of acknowledging a process alarm is determined by the alarm s output response configuration latching or not latching See also ALARM LATCHING and MANUAL ACKNOWLEDGE Adjoining Band One of three types of bi modal band relationships For adjoining band only one type of output action reverse or direct can be active at a time The re verse and direct outputs adjoin at the 0 output level both outputs are at 0 no dead band exists when changing from one output type to the other during either manual or automatic control For the Dimension II adjoining band is selected by entering a value of 0 zero for the controller BAND parameter See also BI MODAL BAND DEAD BAND and OVERLAPPING BAND Alarm A feature that provides a display and or signal if a specified condition occurs Dimension II has the capability of providing high high high low low low deviation high high high low low low process variable watchdog timer and device diagnostic alarms Ambient Ambient refers to the conditions of the surrounding medium e g pressure noise temperature etc Ambient Temperature The temperature around an object neglecting small localized variations Asynchronous Communications A method of transmitting data in which communications timing is synchro nized on a character by character basis Each transmitted character is preceded by a start bit
149. ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 2 21 22 Critical Alarm Window ssssss 2 23 ALARM HISTORY Screen aeeeennnnnseeenseesnnssssnsnn 2 23 CSZ DII Screen Map 2 24 25 RI Operation Icons and Screen Display Groups 2 26 27 Selecting James io ie Hodie geni 2 28 Unit Operation Screen snnannneeneeeeonineesseenrsseesnenennen 2 29 Entering Your Passcode ssssssssee 2 29 30 Using Memory Cards 2 31 Memory Card Operation 2 31 33 Memory Card Information suueueeeeueesuussss 2 33 34 Overview Display Screens sssesssssssessessse 2 35 X Y Graph Overview Display 00oosssnnosssesininirnrrrnnrrrrenne 2 35 Horizontal Bar Graph Overview Display 2 36 Vertical Bar Graph Overview Displays 2 37 Mixed Numeric Text Overview Displays 2 38 39 2 1 Section Introduction CSZ Dimension l User s MANUAL 9 Universal Operator Interface The CSZ Dimension ll universal operator interface is a self contained intelli gent unit equipped with its own on board microprocessor and memory The operator interface provides all the tools needed for system configuration operation and monitoring In all hardware configurations operator interface functions and features are identical Operator interface features include An easy to use set of controls for bo
150. ctions by press ing the knob to highlight the field and rotating the knob to the proper input type See Appendix D table 1 of technical bulletins for descriptions of all selectable analog input types In addition to the thermocouple RTD s and linear inputs there are four range types labeled PG CH 01 PG CH 02 PG CH 03 and PG CH 04 These are used by the factory to calibrate the four independent program mable gain ranges for the analog inputs SelcFunc Selects the input Configuration Function or the input Calibration Function for the analog input designated by input number Either selection opens a window Configur The parameters in this window see Fig 4 26 affect linear input ranges only Linear input ranges are 0 5 volts 0 10 volts 4 20 mA and 0 20 mA The configuration window allows changing the linear input zero Lin Zero the linear input span Lin Span the linear input decimal point position Lin Decp and the linear input engineering units mnemonic Lin Zero sets the zero low point for the selected linear input See table 4 5 for range of settings See examples of possible settings on page 4 46 Lin Span sets the span high point for the selected linear input See table 4 5 for range of settings See examples of possible settings on page 4 46 Lin Decp sets the placement of the decimal point for the selected linear input See table 4 3 for the range of settings See examples of possib
151. d Select what type of alarm either LATCH or NONLATCH The number of degrees the chamber must be inside the alarm limits before the unit will reset Opens a window that permits the user to select ON OFF or PGM mode for any of four unit functions Performs the same functions as window on the CSZ power up screen Function Window Entering Unit Functions Fig 2 7 Fig 2 6 Product Limit Screen Limit Arm m ume NonL Alm Het S Hi Lo Limit Hl K Al Fig 2 7 Product Limit Screen Function Window COND GN Dirr HUMD 272 Un AUK CODL Dn PURGE Cloze Hn Lr LOSE CSZ Dimension Il User s MANUAL Fig 2 8 Chamber Screen Chamber Screen UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE The chamber screen is an informational and an operator changeable screen The parameters that can be selected and changed by the operator are as follows Program Mode Current Segment Events X_Events HEAT COOL HUMIDIFY DE HUMID DEV TEMP DEV RH HUMIDSEL Selects Run or HoldOper mode Changes the status of the programmer Displays the current segment number Changes and displays status of 12 external events 1 9 a c Changes and displays status of four extended events d g These will determine which system function is on if in PGM mode Cond Sys Humid AuxCool Purge Amount of output for the heating control loop In manual mode the amount of output can be set by the operator Amount of output for cooling c
152. d for both Hi and Lo alarms To test the correct action of the front panel keypad UNIT_CNF screen Diagnost Ol Diag ENTR_KEY MACRO1_KY MACRO2 KY UP KEY DOWN KEY LEFT KEY RGHT KEY or HELP KEY Press the knob to enter and exit the keypad test Knob Rotary Knob Test Use Selections Remarks To test the correct action of the rotary knob UNIT CNF screen Diagnost Ol Diag RIGHT or LEFT Press the knob to enter and exit test Lmtd Acc Limited Access Passcode Use Selections Remarks Lo Limit Low Limit Use Selection Remarks KA075771 001 To enter a passcode for LIMITED Access UNIT CNF screen 00 00 00 three 2 digit numbers This is the passcode that will be entered to bring the unit to LIMITED access The present access must be LIMITED or FULL to select this entry Len To set default low limit for Profile display DCON PRG screen Numeric Limit depends on input range A 17 DiMENSION ll SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Logic Internal Logic Assignment Use To make internal logic assignments that can used by the control loops and setpoint programmers Selections CONF_ALM screen OR NOR 1 4 AND NAND 1 4 Remarks Opens a window that allows selecting up to four alarm conditions and contact input states that will operate an internal logic point OR NOR or AND NAND 01 04 This logic point can be used by control loops and setpoint programmers
153. d thermocouple ground the negative lead of each thermocouple to frame ground This will eliminate the common mode voltages 4 Wire 4 20 mA transmitters that are powered by an external supply as follows Power supply positive to the transmitter positive transmitter negative to Dimension analog input positive and Di mension negative to the power supply negative 5 Determine if fluctuation problems are being caused by adjacent channel voltage differences The easiest way to test for this is to remove one input from the Dimension and jumper the terminals on the Dimension where the input was connected and note if the fluctuation is eliminated Repeat this test using the other input f the fluctuation is eliminated in both cases then the problems are input to input related The user should determine if the inputs can be made common to one another Otherwise they require isolation 5 5 DIMENSION II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Error Advise Messages When operator or system faults occur software generated error advise mes sages will be displayed Important Be sure to note the message and reference displayed at the time of a fault Note exactly what operations you were doing any entries or configuration changes you were doing and any other pertinent information to communicate with Research Inc technical service to help isolate the problem If you encounter problems check your system against the erro
154. d this will always show Linear and cannot be changed A 12 KA075771 001 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Enter Enter Passcodes Use Toenteraaccess level passcode Selection Access Enter a passcode to change the security access level Remarks If any invalid passcode is entered access is denied and the access level does not change Access passcodes are defined on the UNIT_CNF screen see Access The default code of 04 01 57 will always gain FULL access Enter Enter Diagnostics Use Open Window of diagnostic selections Selection Diagnost Remarks See Diagnost Event 7HE Programmed Events H H Use Tagnames to display programmed event states Selection LOGIC 3 screen None Remarks Displays the status of all events Tagnames are changed in the Glossary Events Event Tagnames Use Toselecttagnames for events Selection GLOS PRG screen Tagname Remarks The programmer event tagnames can be changed When this entry is selected a window opens to allow access to all 12 event tagnames Evnts Events Use To select the events that will be ON during the currently accessed segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 123456789abc Remarks Selecting 1 through c indicates the event s that will be activated When the programmer is in hold event states may be manipulated by the operator FILE Memory Card File Type Use To select a file type for a memo
155. display a window At the FULL or LIMITED access level alarm limits displayed in the window can be modified If a limit is in an alarm condition the limit will flash For analog input alarms high and low input alarm limits can be set for each input For loop alarms an alarm group number as well as process variable limits and deviation alarms can be selected Five groups of alarm settings are provided for each control loop The setpoint programmer selects which group of alarm settings is enabled during each segment Fig 2 18 Input Alarm Limit Setup Window Analog Input Alarms 1 Use the knob to select the INPUT ALARM field 2 Select the analog input for which you wish to assign high and low alarm limits 3 The system will display the Input Alarm Limit Setup window shown in Fig 2 18 4 Enter high and low alarm limits for the selected input 5 Close window Note Ifa limit is in an alarm condition the limit will flash 2 20 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Loop Alarms 1 Select the LOOP ALARM field and select the loop for which you wish to assign high and low alarm limits The system will display the Loop Alarm Limit Setup window shown in figure 2 19 2 Select the ALARM GROUP field and select the alarm group 1 5 for which you wish to assign high and low alarm limits The system will display the current values for the alarm group you selected 3 Set High High Low Low H
156. displayed as text 4 34 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MaNUAL KA075771 001 Unit CONFIGURATION Table 4 4 gives a listing of all parameters that may be selected and displayed in the formats shown in Fig 4 19 The ProcVr SetPnt Pg Spt Dev DirOut RevOut and Output can be selected for trending and graphing Table 4 4 Selectable Parameters for Format Displays ProcVr Process Variable of loop SetPnt Setpoint of loop Po Spt Programmed Setpoint from programmer Dev_ Deviation of loop DirOut_ Direct Acting Control Output of loop RevOut_ Reverse Acting Control Output of loop Output_ Control Output of loop LpMode Loop Mode of loop PgMode Programmer Mode of programmer CycCnt Cycle Count of programmer CurSeg Current Segment of programmer Remote Start Segment of programmer Time Left in Segment of programmer Time Into program for programmer Time Left in program for programmer Cascade Ratio factor for loop Cascade Blend factor for loop Cascade Scale factor for loop Setpoint Bias for loop PID Gain for loop PID Reset for loop PID Rate for loop Setpoint Source for loop Manual Reset BasVar_ CLC optional Basic Variable BasStat CLC optional Basic Variable Status Build Dimension Il Overview displays as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Overview Display Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 20 2 Use the
157. e A single set of PID tuning constants are used Group 1 Dual Two sets of PID tuning constants are used One set Group 1 is used for a reverse acting heating control output and the second set Group 2 is used for a direct acting cooling control output Typically when Dual PID type is selected bimodal control action has also been selected Progmmed Five programmed sets of PID tuning constants Groups 1 5 are used The setpoint programmer selects the group to be in effect SelAdapt Up to five sets of PID tuning constants may be used A process value BreakPnt is assigned to each group number As the process variable changes the appropriate group is enabled In regions between breakpoints the control interpolates between tuning constants Table 4 1 Active PID Groups by Type Selected X 7 Active KA075771 001 4 27 Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MaNuAL Unit CONFIGURATION Tune Selects auto tuning default parameters Reverse Direct Selects either reverse or direct as the default type of process to be tuned RespTime This is the time it takes the process to stabilize after a step change in the output This will determine the time auto tune will take to evaluate the process and calculate PID parameters Bump Selects the amount of output increase or decrease that will be applied when auto tuning is started A setting of 10 to 20 percent is typical PIDGrp Selects the defa
158. e is analog input number LET format LE CZE I 7 X where is analog input number X is input zero value Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X This reference number should not be changed unless an input channel is being recalibrated PRINT request PR CZE 1 PRINT response 7 9 LET request LE CZE 1 7 7 LET response To monitor or change the digital filter value of an analog input PRINT format PR DF I where is input number LET format LE DF I 2 XXX where is input number XXX is filter value Field length 8 Value XXX O to 100 The filter is used to average the input reading so that minor fluctuations are eliminated The digital filter setting may be from 0 to 100 the higher the B 37 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Examples number the greater the amount of filtering When set to 0 the filtering feature is disabled PRINT request PR DF 1 PRINT response O LET request LE DF 1 12 LET response DH Direct Output High Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or change the direct output high limit DH for a control loop This feature allows the user to set the maximum output percentage for direct outputs PRINT format PR DH L where L is loop LET format LE DH L XXX X Field length 8 Value XXX X The high limit can be set anywhere from 00 0 to 100 0 The direct output high limit can never be less t
159. e The Unit Configuration UNIT display should appear as shown in Figure 1 Hem Card Backl ite Pouer DN Power_UP___ Sus Mode CSTART Figure 1 Unit Display Step 1 When you are at the Unit Operation screen turn the knob right moving the cursor box to Mem_Card Step 2 Push the knob to select the Mem_Card func tions a window will appear with a request to insert the memory card Insert the memory card with the triangle indicator inserted into the memory module port located below the quick keys Now you may select card functions file names or close the window Push the help key for each selection and an explanation of memory card functions will be provided Turn the knob moving the cursor box to FUNC_ and press the knob Tum the knob right or left to view possible selections Selections will include READ Read selected files from the card WRITE Write data to the card and save as a file DIRECT View directory of card contents FORMAT Initialize card for use or erase entire contents of card DELETE Delete a file Copyright 1991 Research Inc Memory Card Setup Guide Step 3 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to Direct and select by depressing the knob A window indicating file names date and size will appear A short message will appear if no files are found Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to Close Wn and press knob Step 4 To select a file turn the knob right moving cur sor to
160. e 6 Autotune Run Complete Window Page2 Using Auto Tune USING BIMODAL CONTROL The setup of bimodal control in the Dimension is very easy Configuration of one screen is all that is required If a unit is in its initial start up phase the correct parameters for bimodal operation are part of the default settings To verify or change the settings for bimodal operation follow these five steps Step 1 Press the diamond keypad down to move to the Program Configuration screen CONF_PRG and press right to access Loop Configuration screen CONF_LOP See Figure 1 QU FFD Ss oo nl im in eu ro Pe Pe ef nl Figure 1 Loop Configuration Screen Step 2 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to Loop_Num Press the knob and rotate right to view selections Select the appropriate loop by pressing the knob again Step 3 Tum the knob right moving cursor to Cntl Act Press the knob and a window will open Step 4 The first selection is Bimodal Turn the knob right to view selections and press to select Bimodal If output limiting is desired or a dead or overlap band is needed this is set under the Limit heading To select limits turn knob right and press to select Limit A third small window will open Turn the knob right or left to scroll through selections which include reverse high limit RvHiL mt reverse low limit RvLoLmt direct high limit DrHiL mt and direct low limit DrHiLmt Also listed is the dead band pa
161. e determined by an input signal Time proportioned out puts are often used to provide control signals to a process The Dimension II has two time proportioned outputs located on the Rear Terminal Assembly See also CYCLE TIME Transient A condition caused by a sudden change and which persists for a relatively short time after the change Unacknowledged Alarm See MANUAL ACKNOWLEDGE E 17 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY W Warm Start One of two configurations for Dimension II power up response If AC power is applied to a Dimension unit that is configured for Warm Start the Dimension continues its previous operations i e the Dimension restarts using the control ler parameters and commands that were in memory at the time power was removed This means that Dimension maybe turned off and back on without losing any of its existing commands or controller parameters See also Cold Start Watchdog Alarm The alarm feature which continuously monitors the Dimension II microproces sor to determine if the processor is functioning normally If a processor mal function occurs the WATCHDOG ALARM mechanical relay located on the rear terminal assembly is triggered This alarm cannot be monitored by the Dimension II display because by definition the alarm indicates a malfunction or loss of power in the Dimension II unit itself Write Protection A feature or condition that prevents data from being entered i
162. e displayed automatically if you attempt to perform actions not permitted on the currently displayed screen Most help messages are an integral part of system software and are not user definable However on the Alarm Display Configuration screen you may enter alarm specific messages that will be displayed when the help key is pressed at the Alarm Status screen Diamond Key Four way Keypad The universal operator interface screen displays are organized in a horizontal vertical hierarchy A set of six graphic icons displayed on the right side of the screen shows where you are located vertically in the screen display hierarchy by displaying the icon in reverse video See Fig 2 2 The diamond key located directly below the help key is used to perform one function to exit from the currently displayed screen and to call up another screen The diamond key has four selections UP Accesses the next icon up and displays the first screen for the icon DOWN Accesses the next icon down and displays the first screen for the icon LEFT Displays the next screen to the left RIGHT Displays the next screen to the right CSZ Dimension ll User s MaNuAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE CSZ Dimension Screen WINDOW SELECTOR BOX INDICATOR HOME POSITION SCREEN TITLE GRAPHIC ICONS CURRENT SELECTION DISPLAYED IN INVERSE VIDEO MACRO KEY LABELS USER DEFINABLE Multi Function Knob The multi function knob is
163. e for Dimension II are Terminal mode Network mode A selection for Serial I O exists and is only used with the Dimension Custom Logic and Control CLC option Use of the Serial I O selection is described in the Dimension Custom Logic and Control manual In the terminal mode a simple X on off handshaking procedure may at the user s option be used for data transfer If used this handshaking is enabled and disabled on a dedicated Dimension II communications screen In the network mode also called Data Link Control or DLC data is transferred in blocks and ASCII control characters are used to regulate data flow Important Network mode may be used only with a host computer Terminal mode can be used by either a host computer or a terminal TA088002 001 DIMENSION II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS RS 422 RS 232 Communications RS 422 COMMUNICATIONS ANALOG INPUTS PORT 1 1 RECEIVE 2 2 RECIEVE 3 3 TRANSMIT o 4 4 TRANSMIT ei a 5 5 SHIELD a DC UI 5 i RS 232 z B COMMUNICATIONS 5 PORT E 1 1 RECEIVE p 2 2 TRANSMIT a E S 3 3 COMMON Es z Es L H RS 422 Communications Port This 4 pin for 8705 6 pin for 8725 terminal block connector can be used to connect Dim
164. e inserted for this to appear DirOut_ Control Loop Direct Output Use To access the control loop reverse output value for loop Selections OVIEW__ orLOOP_ screens LpMode 0 0 to 100 0 Remarks This field is only changeable when the control loop is in manual mode see LpMode A direct output is usually used for cooling DOWStrt Day of Week Start Use To set the day of week on which the programmer will start Selections Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Remarks TOD_Strt must be set to Enable see TOD_Strt DspConf Memory Card Display Configuration File Type Use Mem Card FILE To read write or delete a display configuration file type Remarks SeeFILE Dsp_Profile Display Profile Use Opens a window to graphically display the setpoint program profile Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild Dsp_Profile Remarks See section 3 Echo Communication Echo Use Toselectecho Selections 232 PORT and 422 PORT screens ON or OFF Remarks Echo should be set to ON when communications to the Dimension II is interac tive using a dumb terminal EngUnits Engineering Units Use To select engineering units for an input type Selections INPUTS screen Centigrd Fahrenht Linear Remarks When an RTD or thermocouple is selected under the InptType field this param eter allows a selection between degrees centigrade and degrees fahrenheit If a linear input type has been selecte
165. e the fifth profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P5 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P5 P 2 X where P is programmer number and X is the fifth setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 5 will have if loop 5 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P5 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P5 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P5 3 2 100 7 LET response P6 Programmer Profile 6 Values Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the sixth profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P6 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P6 P X where P is programmer number and X is the sixth setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 6 will have if loop 6 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P6 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a
166. election GLOS IO screen 8 characters Remarks Select up to eight characters to form a new name Con Out Contact Output Logic Assignment Use To make internal logic assignments that can be used to operate contact outputs Selections CONF ALM Con Out OTASet01 OTASet04 Remarks Opens a window that allows selecting up to four alarm conditions and contact input states that will operate contact outputs Con Outs Contact Output Tagnames Use Opens a window to allow changing the tagnames used for contact outputs Selection GLOS IO screen 8 characters Remarks Select up to eight characters to form a new name Configur Configuration Use To configure inputs and outputs Selections ANA OUTS or INPUTS screen SelcFunc opens window Remarks See calibration instructions Allows selection of linear zero and span values KA075771 001 A 9 Dimension Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY ConOutpt Contact Output Use To select a contact output to be configured for time proportioning action Selections CON OUTS screen RmCOut01 through RmCOut16 Remarks The contact outputs are on the contact I O module See calibration instructions for more information Contrast Display Contrast Level Use Setcontrast level Selection Contrast 1 to 26 Remarks Contrast will vary according to vertical viewing level Selected contrast setting is saved if Warmstrt is selected as Sys Mode CPU Brd 1
167. end to affect the process result Examples of such conditions are drafts changes in the energy source supply of voltage stream pressure etc See also CLOSED LOOP and MANUAL CONTROL Open Sensor A condition which indicates a defective process variable signal Typically the process variable sensor will burnout and create an circuit at the process variable input terminals The term BURNOUT is often used synonomously with OPEN SENSOR See also BURNOUT ALARMS and OPEN SENSOR ALARM Open Sensor Alarm One of eleven possible Dimension II process monitoring alarms The OPEN SENSOR ALARM indicates a defective process variable signal The OPEN SENSOR ALARM can detect open circuit conditions for thermocouples RTDs and millivolt input types Note that the OPEN SENSOR ALARM does not detect open circuit conditions in milliamp inputs See also OPEN SENSOR THERMOCOUPLE RTD ALARMS and PROCESS MONITORING ALARMS Oscillation Cycling of the process variable signal above and below the setpoint Output A signal that is produced by a circuit or device for transfer to another circuit or device OUTPUT is also used to identify the terminals that provide the output signal Overlapping Band One of three types of bi modal band relationships in Dimension Il When OVERLAPPING BAND is selected both outputs reverse and direct can be active at the same time This overlap condition occurs at the transition between rev
168. ension II to a supervisory PC Dimension II communication functions are described in Appendix B RS 232 Communcations Port This digitial communications 3 pin for 8705 9 pin for 8725 terminal block connector port can be used for general purpose RS 232 point to point communications Dimension II communications functions are described in Appendix B TA088002 001 B 3 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Shield Connection Note The following shield connection procedure is recommended for typical Dimension II applications However different connection procedures may be required in order to match a particular operating environment or host computer Fig B 2 SHIELD terminal wiring diagram B 4 Use of the SHIELD connection minimizes pickup of electrical noise by the communications wiring The communications cable used for RS 422 connections should include a metal sheath This metal sheath is called the shield The shield surrounds the communications wires to keep out electrical interference In most cases the shield functions best if DC current flow in the shield is blocked and AC voltages are effectively drained to ground This is best achieved as follows 1 To block DC current in the shield connect the shield directly to chassis ground at the host computer and nowhere else 2 To drain AC voltages to ground connect the shield to the SHIELD terminal which is
169. ensneaes 2 20 Loop Alarm Screen oooiiieeeeeeersrrirerresrrrerrrrn 2 21 22 Critical Alarm Window ssssseee 2 23 ALARM HISTORY Gcreen sse 2 23 CSZ DII Screen Map 2 24 25 RI Operation Icons and Screen Display Groups 2 26 27 Selecting Icons ssssssssesee e 2 28 Unit Operation Green 2 29 Entering Your Passcode sseeeeessssss 2 29 30 Using Memory Cards 2 31 Memory Card Operation 2 31 33 CSZ Dimension User s MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS Memory Card Information cccccccccccceessssseeeeeeeees 2 33 34 Overview Display Screens ccccccceeccecesseeeeeeeeennteees 2 35 X Y Graph Overview Display ieeneeeeeeeerrrrrrrn 2 35 Horizontal Bar Graph Overview Display 2 36 Vertical Bar Graph Overview Displays 2 37 Mixed Numeric Text Overview Displays 2 38 39 Section 3 Programmer Operation Programmer Status Screen eeeeeeeeee eere eene 3 2 Programmer Terminology ssssss 3 3 Program Re e EE 3 4 Building a Setpoint Program sees 3 5 Recipe Build Screen nssoeeennssseniressrrrirnrrsssrssssrerrrrersssss 3 5 Internal X Events sue eoor rire cosneecide einn toon enm RR o geg 3 7 Example EE 3 8 EIERE 3 8 Convert Graph to a Table 200 00 ceeccccceeeessteeeeeeeeseeeee
170. enter a new label and function for the Second macro key KA075771 001 Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Setting System Start Mode The CSZ Dimension ll can be set up to handle memory contents in one of three ways when line power is removed from the system AUTO START All parameters and data residing in memory will be maintained by battery power up to several years after a power down and the system will resume where it left off when powered up again COLD START All data residing in memory will be erased when line power is removed The original factory default settings for all param eters and data will be in effect when the unit is powered up again e WARM START All parameters and data residing in memory will be maintained by battery power after a power down except the four func tion parameters for Cond Sys Humid Aux Cool and Purge These will default to off Note Analog input output calibration and configuration is retained in separate memory andisnotaffected by a system cold start Set the system start mode as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Unit Configuration icon The system will display the Unit Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 9 2 Usethe knob to select the SYS MODE field 3 Select WARMSTRT or COLDSTRT or AUTOSTART The mode you selected is now active and will remain active until you change it again Diagnostic and Troubleshooting Refer to section
171. equest PR LNS 1 PRINT response 100 000 LET request LE LNS 1 99 356 LET response LNZ Linear Analog Input Zero Purpose To view or change the input zero value for a linear analog input determined during calibration Use PRINT format PR LNZ I where is analog input number LET format LE LNZ I 7 X where is analog input number X is input zero value Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X Remarks This value defaults to zero percent Examples PRINT request PR LNZ 1 PRINT response 0 0 LET request LE LNZ 1 2 2 LET response LP Loop Screen Titles Purpose To view or change the titles of Loop Display screens Use STAG format STAG LP S where S is a loop screen number CTAG format CTAG LP S X where S is loop screen number X is screen title Field length 8 Remarks Default screen titles include LOOP__1 through LOOP__ 8 Examples STAG request STAG LP 1 STAG response LOOP___ 1 TA088002 001 B 45 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS A AAA CTAG request CTAG LP 1 LP1 CTAG response LPC Limited Passcode Purpose To view or change the passcode required to change the security access level to LIMITED status Use PRINT format PR LPC LET format LE LPC X where X is passcode Field length 8 Value XX XX XX Remarks The LIMITED passcode permits access to all system Operation functions Examples PRINT request PR LPC PRINT
172. er in the program screen The X_Evnts will control the system functions in the following manner Fig 3 6 d Controls the Cond System e Controls the Humd System f Controls the Aux Cool g Controls the Purging Fig 3 6 Program Run Screen Events Window SS Euntes dof Close Hn ELOSE en Pro Close fn CLOSE ae ea ae ee ee STOP 3 7 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Example Recipe Graphing a Recipe Fig 3 7 Graph of test to be Segment performed 20 21 25 26 27 Y AA Temperature Temperature Humidity Humidity 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 Time minutes Convert Graph Table Fig 3 8 Converti ae ee SETPOINT PROGRAM WORKSHEET mm ee Recipe 1 8 Stat Segment 020 Fam HEAR 8 8 00 8 00 8 8 8 Q ZS o E m o G O Q o 7 N ei o X Ce aso Cer E se KS CC ES SS Ee ES CC EXT ES PE pe Et RENE PID Group Da 3 8 CSZ Dimension II User s MaNUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION SETPOINT PROGRAM WORKSHEET Bach recipe has S unique Start pedals g Segment start Segment O20 Recipe luses Senor 020 021 022 023 024 o25 0268 27 segments 1 20 4 Segment Time 00 00 01 to 99 59 59 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 03 00 ture Note zero time Event D for our example turns on A i Humidi the circulation fan iid Aux Cool Ge 7 Next Segmen OG
173. er loop s The operator cannot change the setpoint in this mode Closed Loop A process control signal path which forms a closed circuit consisting of a forward path a feedback path and a summing junction The summing junc tion automatically adjusts the circuit operation so that the feedback signal is equal to a setpoint See also AUTOMATIC CONTROL and FEEDBACK Cold Junction The point at which a thermocouple s signal wires connect to an electrical circuit Because the cold junction connections are made with dissimilar metals e g thermocouple wires and brass screws these connections provide an output voltage proportional to their temperature just as at the heated junc tion The cold junction is frequently referred to as the reference junction Connecting a thermocouple s signal wires to the Dimension IIs Rear Terminal Assembly creates a cold junction See also COLD JUNCTION COMPENSA TION and THERMOCOUPLE Cold Junction Compensation An automatic adjustment that compensates for the voltage generated at the cold junction of a thermocouple Due to this compensation the adjusted signal reflects only the temperature at the heated junction the thermocouple itself See also COLD JUNCTION and THERMOCOUPLE Cold Start One of two configurations for Dimension II power up response See also WARM START If AC power is applied to a Dimension that is configured for COLD START all controller parameters and commands are set to
174. eration screens and the Unit Configuration screen Most Dimension II Configuration screen titles are not changeable A screen title is displayed on the top line of each Operation display and the title for each screen is unique For Unit Unit Cnf Overview Program Loop Logic and Alarm screen titles a one line entry or window is displayed in which you can scroll through and modify the title of each screen 4 19 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 11 Unit Glossary Configuration Screen CSTARTI STOF Programmer Glossary Configuration Screen Refer to Fig 4 12 The Programmer Glossary Configuration screen is used to change the tag names used in Dimension Il system programmers When a programmer number 1 8 is selected in the first field tag names for Programmer mode programmer setpoint time left in segment time into seg ment time left in programmer current segment number cycle count alarm group and PID group can be modified When Program name is selected a one line window is displayed the tag names for up to 8 program names can be modified When the events field is selected a one line window is displayed the tag names for up to 12 events can be modified The tag names can be modified for each individual programmer selected GE GLOS_PRG O 85 07 25 Configuration Screen 4 20 KA075771 001 Dimension Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Loop Glossary
175. erse and direct output occur smoothly during automatic control without DEAD BAND the controller may alternate between small levels of direct and reverse output due to electri cal noise or minor variations in process deviation DEAD BAND is selected by entering a positive value for the controller BAND parameter in the Dimension H s lower display The larger the positive BAND value the larger the size of the DEAD BAND See also BIL MODAL BAND ADJOINING BAND and OVERLAPPING BAND Derivative Control Action Rate Control action in which the control signal is adjusted according to the rate of change of the process variable See also RATE GAIN and RESET Deviation The difference between the setpoint and the actual value of the process vari able Gee PROCESS VARIABLE and SETPOINT deviation under temp deviation over temp Direct Acting Control An automatic control configuration in which the value of the control signal increases as the process variable increases assuming a fixed setpoint Typi cally used to control cooling equipment See also REVERSE ACTING CON TROL and BI MODAL CONTROL Droop The term droop is commonly used within the process control industry to indicate OFFSET OFFSET is a steady state deviation from setpoint Typically found in heating control systems if reset action is not used See also OFFSET STEADY STATE DEVIATION and SETPOINT KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User
176. erse and direct output action and is present for both manual and automatic control Use of OVERLAPPING BAND minimizes any disturbance to the process during transitions between direct and reverse control one output is always actively in control when the other output is being turned on or off OVERLAPPING Band is selected by entering a negative value for the controller Band parameter on the Dimension II The more negative the value the larger the size of the Overlapping Band See also Bi Model Band Adjoining Band and Dead Band E 11 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY E 12 Parameter A variable that is assigned a specific value according to the requirements of a particular situation or application More specifically the user entered values that configure the Dimension II and direct the operation of the controller s Percent Output A controller parameter which identifies the output level for a control signal as a percent of the maximum possible output PID An acronym for Proportional Integral Derivative PID describes a process controller design which includes proportional GAIN plus integral RESET plus derivative RATE action to control a process PID controllers like the Dimension II are often called 3 mode controllers See also AUTOMATIC CONTROL GAIN PROPORTIONAL BAND RESET and RATE Port In digital communications that part of a device which receives data from and or transmits d
177. es for the Dimension II In FULL ACCESS the user can change all controller parameters See also LIMITED ACCESS KA075771 001 E 7 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY G Gain Gain is a multiplication term expressing how the controller output varies with respect to change in input error In general GAIN is defined as a relationship between the input and output of a circuit GAIN Output in percent Input in percent As one of the three PID parameters GAIN determines the degree of propor tional P control action The output percent contribution from the gain term is determined by Output Deviation X Gain Input Range Span See also PID RESET RATE and PROPORTIONAL BAND Hardware Physical equipment and devices mechanical magnetic electrical or electronic See also SOFTWARE Handshaking The exchange of predetermined signals to coordinate digital communications between two devices High Deviation The Dimension II controller parameter sets the high process variable alarm trigger level The HI DEV value determines the positive deviation level devia tion above setpoint at or above which a high deviation process alarm is trig gered See also ALARM PROCESS MONITORING ALARM LO DEV LO LO DEV HI HI DEV HI PV HI HI PV LO PV and LO LO PV High Process Variable The Dimension II controller parameter sets the high process variable alarm trigger level The HI PV value
178. ess again to enter Step 7 Step seven will configure the zero and span values for analog output zero Turn the knob right once moving cursor box to SelcFunc The Configure option will be shown Select it again by pressing the knob to highlight and press the knob to select The Configure Outputs screen will appear As described in Step 5 assign zero and span values to analog output 2 and close the window For our example we will be using the following zero and span assignments zero z 75 00 span z 100 00 From 0 to 75 percent output normal output will be on At 75 percent output boost output percent will be zero See Figure 4 On your Dimension screen normal output is shown as 0 to 75 percent Boost stage is shown from 75 to 100 percent output At 87 5 percent output boost output percent will be half At 100 percent output boost output percent will be full on More output stages can be easily added using the available outputs Staged outputs can also be used as cooling direct acting outputs The limit to the number staged outputs available is dependent upon the physical number of outputs available All staged outputs must be resident onthe analog I O card Therefore one may only have six staged outputs per pair of loops USER ENTERED STAGING POINT Figure 4 Staged Outputs Staged Outputs Page 2 USING TIME PROPORTIONED OUTPUTS This guide will describe the five easy steps required to assign control loop output signals to a
179. essure switch for the Stage 2 compressor This switch is factory set at 310 psi and will automatically reset when the pressure drops below its trip point However a critical alarm must be reset by the operator once the pressure switch has automatically reset itself 2 17 CSZ Dimension l UsER s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Alarms Fig 2 16 Alarm Acknowledge Screen 2 18 Alarm Acknowledge Screen The Dimension ll system includes two types of Alarm displays to help the operator with alarm handling during daily operation The Alarm Acknowledge screen and the Alarm Set Up screen To access Alarm displays use the diamond key to select the alarm icon To call up specific Alarm displays press the diamond key LEFT or RIGHT When an alarm becomes active the Alarm icon flashes regardless of which Di mension screen is currently called up Acknowledge alarms as follows 1 Use the diamond key to access the Alarm Displays icon The system will display the Alarm Acknowledge screen shown in Fig 2 16 2 Use the knob to select the alarm you wish to acknowledge 3 Press the Help key to display a user entered help message if any 4 Press ENTER to acknowledge the alarm If the alarm cannot be acknowl edged example an open sensor the alarm description will not change and the icon will continue to flash If the alarm is acknowledged the description will change to NO ALARM and the icon will stop flashing CSZ Dimen
180. eters and data residing in memory will be maintained by battery power up to several years after a power down and the system will resume where it left off when powered up again If the system is set up for a cold start however all data residing in memory will be erased when line power is removed Configuration param eters must be reconfigured or reloaded from memory cards Refer to Section 3 Using Memory Cards topic for the procedure to save your unit configuration Communications Configuration The Dimension Il can be configured for RS 232 standard or RS 422 option communication See Appendix B for information on how to configure your unit for serial communications 4 54 KA075771 001 DIMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION ee eee ee ee See KA075771 001 4 55 Cevewsiow Il SERIES 8700 User s Manuar Unit CONFIGURATION Section 5 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Diagnostic Testing GE eer Help Message PUTET Input Fluctuation Condition UN Error Advice Messages GER Troubleshooting Guide eae ERO Seager T 5 1 Unit CONFIGURATION Dimension H SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Section e Diagnostics and Troubleshooting munication problems Descriptions of self diagnostics built in help functions error This section explains how to diagnose and correct Dimension Il operation and com advise messages and a troubleshooting checklist are included CAUTION Dimensio
181. f contact control Direct acting Control output used for cooling Icons Graphic symbols displayed on the right hand side of CSZ Dimension II dis plays representing specific operation or configuration functions Memory Card Removable data cartridge used to store CSZ Dimension II setpoint profile programs or configuration data PAT Position adjusting transmitter for valve position control PC Personal computer Reverse acting Control output used for heating Selector Box The moveable graphic box that indicates where you may enter or select information on CSZ Dimension Il displays In its home inactive position the selector box is located between the screen title and time indicator on the top line of the screen CSZ Dimension l User s MANUAL INTRODUCING CSZ DimeNsION II How to Get Help On many operator interface displays messages are displayed that will tell you how to proceed or how to correct an error Also pop up help windows can be called up by simply pressing the Help key e Press the Help key again or the knob to make the window disappear If you can t find the answer you need on a specific display or help window refer to the glossary or reference section If you need assistance from CSZ Dimension ll technical support personnel call CSZ Dimension Il Technical Support Cincinnati Sub Zero 12011 Mosteller Road Cincinnati Ohio 45241 1 513 772 8810 1 5 INTRODUCING CSZ DiM
182. f loop 3 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P3 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P3 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P3 3 2 100 7 LET response P4 Programmer Profile 4 Values TA088002 001 Purpose Use Remarks To view or change the fourth profile value loop setpoint for a given programmer PRINT format PR P4 P where P is programmer number LET format LE P4 P 2 X where P is programmer number and X is the fourth setpoint value for programmer P Field length 8 Value Any valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 4 will have if loop 4 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P4 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa B 53 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Examples tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P4 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P4 3 2 100 7 LET response P5 Programmer Profile 5 Values Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or chang
183. g 4 16 The Loop Configuration screen is used to perform the loop configuration process Primary selections made on this screen open windows for configuration parameter selection Fig 4 16 Loop Configuration Parameter Selection Windows Process Variable bl Loop In put Source Control Acton SEH T ype g Output Limits Select Loop to Configure F3C2 Loop Coniguration 16 Loop Num LogPNma eae ooP_Num ooPNm PUsource__AnlgIng P ntl Det Bimodal PID_Tyre Single Tune eyenrse RemSPsrc Dutputt Ter eer AAA Ee JutsSre__OPerata mo poin HlarmHct Default Retrnsmt__AnlgiIng Source amp B Cascade Setup Auto Manual Source EUNFLLUMN IXTIZU Tra I Manual Cutput Source Default Outputfor Open Sensor Alarm KA075771 001 4 25 Unit CONFIGURATION Dimension I SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Configure Dimension loop parameters and characteristics as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Loop Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 16 Use the knob to select the LOOP NUMBER field Select the tag name of the loop you wish to configure Tag names may be changed as described in Defining Glossary Terminology in this section The system will display the currently active parameters and characteris tics for the loop you selected Modify control loop parameters and characteristics as follows PVsource Selects the process variable source loop input to
184. grammer Update Rate 0 1 seconds Analog Inputs Number One to six per analog I O card Types amp Ranges See Table 1 Accuracy See Table 1 Temperature Stability See Table 1 Repeatability 0 008 percent full scale Resolution Analog 16 bits 0 0015 Failed Sensor Detection Available for thermocouple inputs Controller response to a failed sensor condition is selectable as Output Hold or Output to Default Value Filtering Keyboard selectable Noise Rejection Normal Mode 60db min 50 60 Hz Common Mode Thermocouple RTD amp Linear 0 1KHz 90db 70db DC 120db 100db Sampling Rate 0 1 second Input Impedance Thermocouple and voltage 10M ohms Current 500 ohms Process Outputs Output Action Output Signal Types Impedance Limits Compliance Voltage Output Limiting Bi Modal Band Relationship Update Time Resolution Alarms Process Input Communications Types Protocol Baud Rate Maximum Distance Operator Interface Interconnection Cable Type of Display Display Resolution User configurable as reverse direct or bi modal Analog One to four outputs per Analog I O Card Each output factory configurable as 0 5VDC 0 20mA 4 20mA or as on off time proportioning Voltage output 300 ohms minimum Current output 600 ohms maximum Voltage output N A Current output 14 5VDC minimum Separately adjustable for each output reverse and or direct acting of each controller channel as high limit and or low limit
185. han the direct output low limit PRINT request PR DH 1 PRINT response 100 00 LET request LE DH 1 90 00 LET response DL Direct Output Low Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or change the direct output low limit DL for a control loop This feature allows the user to set the minimum output percentage for direct outputs PRINT format PR DL L where L is loop LET format LE DL L XXX X Field length 8 Value XXX X The low limit can be set anywhere from 00 0 to 100 0 The direct output low limit can never be greater than the direct output high limit PRINT request PR DL 1 PRINT response 0 00 LET request LE DL 1 10 0 LET response DO Direct Output in percent Purpose Use Remarks Examples To monitor or change the direct output PRINT format PR DO L where L is loop LET format LE DO L XXX X Field length 8 Value XXX X 0 00 100 00 The direct output may be monitored displayed at any time Control outputs may be changed only when the control loop is in the manual mode PRINT request PR DO 1 PRINT response 50 00 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS LET request LE DO 1 75 LET response DOW Day of Week Start Purpose Use Remarks Examples DT Date Purpose Use Remarks Examples DV Deviation Purpose Use Remarks Examples
186. he Macro Keys and Access selection are selectable with an access level of NONE An access level of FULL allows any parameter to be modified Cntl Act Control Loop Control Action Use Selections To select the type of control action for the control loop CONF LOP screen None Reverse Direct or Bimodal KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks This field will open a window to allow selection of control action None Selects no control action Control loop is not used Reverse Selects reverse acting control Reverse acting control is used for processes where when the input signal increases the output signal needs to decrease to maintain control Most heating processes use reverse acting control Direct Selects direct acting control Direct acting control is used for processes where when the input signal increases the output signal needs to increase to maintain control Most cooling processes use direct acting control Bimodal Bimodal control is used two control outputs are utilized to provide both a reverse and a direct acting output When making these selections a Limit setting is presented The Limit setting allows entry of output limit values ColdStrt Cold Start Power Up Mode Use To select cold start power up mode Remarks SeeSys Mode Con Ins Contact Input Tagnames Use Opens a window to allow changing the tagnames used for contact inputs S
187. he analog board Call technical support 5 6 ConCage Error Illegal Assignment ConCage Error Read Only Parameter ConCage Error Buffer Overflow St EE o gt g ES N DIMENSION Il SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Table 5 1 Dimension I Error Advise Messages REFERENCE ERROR ADVISE MESSAGE ACTION Comm Error Check communications setup and connections ADV14 ConCage Error Card Not Available Install or reset I O card Error 410 ADV15 ConCage Error Network timeout error Check communications setup and Error 500 connections ADV16 Fatal Error ConCage can t find system mod Error 700 ADV 17 Fatal Error ConCage can t move mod to EE Error 701 ADV18 Fatal Error ConCage can t build BB dir Error 702 ADV19 Fatal Error ConCage not enough Ram in BB Error 703 ADV20 Fatal Error ConCage can t build Recipe Dir Error 704 ADV13 This block of errors typically refer to Dimension Il operating ADV21 Error 705 ADV22 Fatal Error ConCage can t link to Rng Rom Error 706 ADV23 Fatal Error ConCage can t link to Fbattr1 Error 707 Fatal Error ConCage can t link to Cfgpths system and control software problems The problems are related to ADV24 hardware failures in the Error 708 ADV25 Fatal Error ConCage can t open SPI device Error 709 ADV26 Fatal Error ConCage can t set EE CRC Error 710 ADV27 Fatal Error ConC
188. he control loop output needs to be multiplied by a ratio to conform to the proper input limits For example if the furnace tempera ture runs from 0 to 1300 C then the ratio should be 13 full scale reverse output ratio Remote Setpoint 10096 13 1300 When using Blended cascade the setpoint of the first loop is multiplied by a blend factor and this is added to the output the ratio BIndFctr SP Loop 1 RevOutput ratio Remote Setpoint In this case if the BIndFctr is set to 0 2 and the Maximum setpoint for Loop 1 is 1000 C then the Ratio should be set to 11 0 2 1000 C max 10094 11 1300 A 28 KA075771 001 Dimension Il SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remote Setpoint RemStart Use This field is used to select the source for starting a programmer from a remote source Selections CONF PRG screen RmStrt01 RmStrt04 OR set 1 4 NORset 1 4 ANDset 1 4 NANDset 1 4 RemCI 1 8 Remarks See OPStart Reset_ Control Loop PID Reset Use To set PID Reset for control loop 4 Selection LpModexx 0 00 off to 300 00 Remarks Thereset factor is used to correct for process losses Reset adds or subtracts from the control loop output The effect of Reset can be calculated by the following equation Output Reset x Elapsed Time in minutes x Deviation Input span RespTyp Auto Tune Response Type Use To select the type of control
189. he knob Turn the knob right to scroll through card selections Scroll until AnigCrd1 appears and press the knob to enter selection If AnlgCrd1 is already shown when the CONF OUT screen appears select it again by turning knob to highlight Card Sel and press the knob AnlgCrd1 will now be highlighted Simply press the knob again to select the choice A new window will appear to allow output assignments See Figure 2 Copyright 1991 Research Inc Staged Outputs Setup Guide CSTARTI CSTOP Figure 2 Configure Outputs Screen Step 3 Step three will assign analog output one and two as reverse acting The cursor box will surround AnaOut01 when the new window appears Press the knob and turn right to scroll through options until RevOutL1 appears Press the knob to select Turn the knob to highlight the AnaOut02 selection and press the knob Turn the knob to scroll through options until RevOutL1 appears Press the knob to select Two analog outputs will be used as reverse outputs to control the two heating elements in our application Analog output 1 will be assigned as normal output and analog output 2 will be assigned as the boost stage Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to Close Wnand press the knob to select The CONF OUT screen will appear Step 4 Step four will configure analog output one Press the diamond key down twice to highlight the Hardware Calibration icon amp Press the key right until the Analog O
190. he programmer in Hold LE PS 1 H The programmer really should be in Hold or at PC END before you start another recipe program but this sets programmer 1 status to Hold if it happens to be in Run If itis at PC END it will remain at PC END If it is in Run it will stop and hold its present setpoints This should ensure that the following commands will be accepted Step 2 Create a Recipe in the Segment Table 1 132 90 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 30 00 0 2 1 1 1 2 90 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 00 00 0 5 1 1 1 3 25 50 0 0 D0 0 0 0 01 15 00 ef AEN This program will increase the temperature to 90 degrees and humidity to 80 over one hour thirty minutes hold these settings for four hours then ramp back down to 25 degrees and 50 humidity in one hour fifteen minutes It sets no event outputs and it uses Alarm Group 1 and PID Group 1 for the entire TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Error Mess TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS program Step 3 Set the Operator Start Segment for the programmer LE PS4 1 1 Set the Operator Start Segment for programmer 1 to segment 1 Step 4 Set modes of programmed loops to Auto LE LS 1 A Set Loop Status for loop 1 to Auto LE LS 2 A Set Loop Status for loop 2 to Auto Step 5 Issue the Start Programmer command LE PS 1 2 S Start programmer 1 at segment in PS4 1 Once this last command is given programmer 1 will start running segment 1 and
191. here V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BNV V X where V is variable number and X is a number Field length 8 BNV 1 to BNV 32 are general use numeric variables for CLC programming Their meaning and use is determined by the user BHL V and BLL V control acceptable input for BNV V and BND V and BEU V control how it is displayed on the Dimension II operator interface PRINT request PR BNV 4 PRINT response 123 4 LET request LE BNV 1 2 100 LET response BSV CLC Basic String Variable B 32 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Purpose To view or change a CLC string variable Use PRINT format PR BSV V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BSV V XXXXXXXX where V is variable number and XXXXXXXX is an 8 character string Field length 8 Remarks BSV 1 to BSV 32 are general use string type variables for CLC programming Their meaning and use is determined by the user BLV V controls the choices available on the Dimension Il operator interface for BSV V Examples PRINT request PR BSV 1 PRINT response Enable LET request LE BSV 1 Disable LET response CAG Current Alarm Group Purpose To view the number of the currently active alarm group Use PRINT format PR CAG P where P is programmer number Field length 8 Value 1 5 Remarks Displays the number of the alarm group currently being used Example
192. iew Making configuration selections Control loop configuration Setpoint programmer configuration Alarm and logic configuration Output configuration Glossary tag names configuration Operator Interface display configuration Input Output configuration and calibration Setting up security access passcodes Defining macro keys Setting system start mode Saving control configuration data memory cards KA075771 001 Dimension Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL Un t CONFIGURATION Before You Configure Before you proceed be sure to read and observe the following guidelines 1 Be sure that your Dimension ll system has been installed properly as described in section 2 of this manual 2 Power up the system by applying AC power to the control cage connec tor J7 After several seconds the start up routine and diagnostics will be finished and the system will display the Unit Operation screen 3 When you are finished making unit configuration changes you should save your configuration data onto a memory card as described under the Setting System Start Mode topic in this section Important If you do not save your configuration data onto a memory card it could be lost when power is removed from the system See discussion of warm start and cold start under the last topic in this section Moving Around the Configuration Screens Fig 4 1 illustrates a map of the screens used for configuration Dimension II Configuration
193. igh and Low alarm process variable limits and the High High Low Low High and Low process variable deviation from setpoint limits for the selected loop and group When you are finished with the first loop and group set limits for all other loops and groups in the same way The available alarms are described below HiHiPV A high PV alarm point designated as high high to indicate it can be used as a second HiPV trip point just outside the HiPV setting to act as a shutdown condition after HiPV has indicated a warn ing condition HiPV A high PV alarm point that trips when its limit is exceeded LoLoPV A low PV alarm point designated as low low to indicate it can be used as a second LoPV trip point just outside of the LoPV setting to act as a shutdown condition after LoPV has indicated a warn ing condition LoPV A low PV alarm point that trips when its limit is exceeded Note Five groups of alarm settings are provided for each control loop The setpoint programmer selects which group of alarm settings is enabled during each segment The setpoint source must be set to programmer for running a program 2 21 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 19 Loop Alarm Limit Setup Window 2 22 Loop Alarms Cont d HiHiPV A Hi Dev alarm point designated as high high to indicate it can be used as a second Hi Dev trip point just outside the Hi Dev setting to act as a shutdown condition after Hi Dev has
194. ilable CSZ Dimension ll programmer functions permit the use of programs up to 256 segments 750 segments optional with segment times from 1 second to 99 hours Also you can assign analog outputs for either process control customer events or retransmission of profile characteristics Time proportioned outputs are also able to be configured and a wide variety of alarm and event schemes are user selectable Other CSZ Dimension II features include User selectable graphic displays X Y graphs bar graphs numeric User defined scaling and screen display terminology Setpoint programming with graphic profile displays Automatic or manual start stop of stored batch programs Up to two control loops with auto tuning setpoint ramping and part temperature control Up to twelve analog inputs for both control and monitoring Up to four analog outputs for control One setpoint programmer PID control with direct reverse or bi modal control action PID control with step response auto tuning Bumpless transfer for manual auto modes Full set of high low and deviation alarm functions Instant alarm display and response capabilities CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL INTRODUCING CSZ DIMENSION II Three levels of system security with passcode control Large easy to use multi function knob for data entry and parameter selection Large diamond shaped four way display select key and graphic icons for quick screen access Dedicated help
195. imension II system variables that can be used for communi cations The format and operation of all Dimension II system variables are described on the following pages The variables are organized alphabetically by system variable code e g AB ACL ACP etc The following information is provided for each system variable System variable code a two or three letter abbreviation for each system variable For example SP is the code for the setpoint system variable System variable name For example setpoint Purpose A description of the typical use of the variable Use Describes valid commands PR LE STAG C TAG field length format Remarks Information for the operation and use of the variable If the format is complex additional format information is provided i TT tS Note The caret symbol indicates the position of spaces in ing the variable in a request message and the pn necessary additional explanations are subsequent response message W provided commands ana responses I LET and CI AG commands spaces must be typed after an alphabetical entry so the total number of characters matches the field length Spaces are not required for numeric entries AB Programmer Abort Enable Purpose Use Remarks Examples B 24 To Enable or Disable programmer abort PRINT format PR AB P where P is programmer number LET format LE AB P Enable enables abo
196. imension ll User s MANUAL Fig 2 27 Unit Operation Screen UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE BACKLITE When you select this field a window opens in which you may select SET and then select ON backlight always on OFF backlight always off or CYCLE backlight turns on and off at specified times The ON and OFF fields allow the user to set the on off cycle times POWER DN Displays the date and time of the last power down Not acces sible POWER UP Displays the time and date of the last power up Not accessible SYS MODE Indicates system was powered up with a warm start default factory configuration auto start or cold start Access Contrast Power DN Power Up H H F 1 E 0 H H H H M e e 8 Z eo D Entering Your Passcode If passcodes have not been assigned to your system access FuLt on Unit Operation screen you may disregard this topic If passcodes have been assigned obtain your passcode from your controller operations supervisor and proceed as follows 1 When you attempt to access a restricted function or screen the system will display a message instructing you to enter the correct passcode 2 From any screen in the system use the diamond key to access the Unit Operation icon RI logo 3 Select the access field and the system will display the window shown in Fig 2 28 4 Press ENTER The first two digits of a 6 digit passcode will be high lighted 2 29 CSZ Di
197. indow shown in Fig 3 18 can be accessed from any Loop display screen X Y Graph Bar Graph Numeric Character in the Operation area To call up this window first press the diamond key until the Loop Operation icon is selected and then call up the Loop display display type loop number you wish to work with by pressing the diamond key Then use the knob to select the LPMODEO1 AUTO MANUAL field Fig 3 18 willl appear Loop gain reset rate and manual reset can be adjusted in this window along with loop mode status PID group and set point source In addition a specialized loop auto tuning window can be called up from within this window Loop Setup Window parameter selections and entries include LpMode01 Select auto or manual mode RevOut_1 Enter loop output value DirOut_1 Enter loop output value SptSrc01 Select setpoint source operator remote programmer ManReset Enter manual reset value PID_Grp Select PID group 1 5 Gain Enter gain value 0 0 to 327 0 Reset Enter reset value 0 0 to 300 0 repeats minute Rate Enter rate value 0 0 to 200 0 minutes with 1 second resolution AutoTune Call up loop auto tuning window See following topic Close Wn Closes window Note For further explanation of PID theory reference The Fundamentals of PID Contact our Literature Department at 612 941 3300 for a copy Fig 3 18 Loop Setup Window 3 24 0 00 Operator 0 00 1 1 00 0 00 r m 0
198. ing taken from the transducer PT2 located on the suction side of the compressor Displays the discharge line temperature reading taken from a thermocouple located on the discharge line of the compressor Indicates the status of the oil pressure switch input Note Not all models of chambers are equipped with an oil pressure safety switch Indicates the total number of hours the Stage 1 compressor has been running This value can be reset in the field by performing a cold start operation see pg 4 17 on sysmode Indicates the number of times the Stage 1 compressor has been started This value can be reset by performing a COLDSTART on the unit see section pg 4 17 on sysmode The current value of the time out timer The time out timer will shut down the compressors when cooling has not been used for the set number of seconds The compressors will not shut down while the HUMD SYS is on Range 30 180 seconds default 90 seconds CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Stage 2 Screen The stage 2 screen is also an informational screen only It displays the stage 2 compressor information including Fig 2 10 Same descriptions as Stage 1 STAG CUR The current value of the stagger start timer STAG PRE The stagger start timer starts the stage 2 compressor the set number of seconds after the stage 1 compressor starts Range 30 120 default 60 seconds Fig 2 10 Stage 2 Screen crm
199. interface displays a graphic SELECTOR BOX which indi cates the currently active data entry field or selection on a screen In its home position the selector box is displayed as a blinking square graphic object between the screen title and time indicator on the top line of the screen When a window is displayed on a screen the selector box disappears and another box with a smaller box inside is displayed When an icon or data entry field is displayed in reverse video on a screen that icon or field is currently selected except for function icons Non Critical Alarms When a non critical alarm becomes active the alarm icon begins to blink When all alarms are acknowledged on the Alarm Status screen the icon stops blinking Critical Alarms When a critical alarm occurs an informational window will be displayed as to the cause The unit will not reset until the alarm condition has been cleared and the alarm acknowledged Please refer to Fig 2 21 for more information 1 3 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL INTRODUCING CSZ DIMENSION II Terminology Terms used in the documentation that may be unfamiliar to you are defined below Auto tuning Controller initiated calculation of tuning constants for a PID control loop Bi modal Reverse and direct acting control outputs used for heating cooling CAT Current adjusting transmitter for variable signal control DAT Duration adjusting transmitter for time proportioned on of
200. ion Il SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Handshke Handshake Use Selections Remarks To select hardware handshaking 422 PORT or232 PORT screen Enable or Disable Set to match your computer Hi Limit High Limit IEN Use Selection Remarks To set default high limit for Profile display DCON PRG screen Numeric Limit depends on input range InFitrXX Filter Constant Use Selections Remarks To enter filtering value CONF LOP screen PV Source AnlgInxx 0 100 Range 0 100 seconds 0 default A function of time Higher time constant more filter Inpt Num Input Number Use Selections Remarks Selects which input is to be set up INPUTS screen ANLGIN 1 to ANLGIN 18 Number of Analog inputs depends on Dimension Il unit purchased i e 8705 or 8725 InptHiLim input High Limit Use Selection Remarks To select the upper limit for the input type selected INPUTS screen Numeric This parameter is used when Thermocouple or RTD inputs are selected These limits are used by the PID control algorithm as the range of the input to be controlled They are also used by the operator interface to limit operator setpoint entries The limits are stored in the EEPROM of the analog I O card InptLowLim Input Low Limit Use Selection Remarks A 16 To select the lower limit for the input type selected INPUTS screen Numeric This parameter is
201. ir temperature process variable TEMP SP Displays air temperature setpoint RH Displays relative humidity process variable RH SP Displays relative humidity setpoint Functions Opens a window that permits the user to select ON OFF or PGM mode for any of four unit functions CSZ Screen Function Window Entering Unit Functions Three modes are available for each function Fig 2 5 ON Turns the corresponding function on and illuminates the Icon pointed to by the arrow in inverse video Black letters light grey background OFF Turns the corresponding function off and displays the Icon pointed to by the arrow in normal video Light grey letters black background PGM Allows the X Events from a programmed recipe to control the function Fig 2 4 Fig 2 5 CSZ Display Screen CSZ Screen Function Window _ GER COND COND NG 0n STR HUMD SVS__O HIR EE AUX cooL 8n E Io PURGE ff Cloze Hn CLOSE Ix DOL PURGE CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Product Limit Screen The following information and functions are available at this screen Fig 2 6 PRODTEMP Hi Limit Lo Limit Alarm Alm Type Alm Hyst Functions Displays the product temperature process variable The value at which the product limit high temperature alarm will shut down the chamber The value at which the product limit low temperature alarm will shut down the chamber Alarm status OK or Trippe
202. irect Select reverse when tuning a reverse acting process such as a heating process Select direct when tuning a direct acting process such as a cooling process TuneErr Auto Tuning Error Use Selections Remarks To indicate an error has occurred when auto tuning LOOP_ screen LpMode Autotune SetParms None Error code number will appear press help for explanation of error UNIT Unit Screen Title Use Selection Remarks Screen title tagname GLOS SYS screen No selection This screen is the default screen upon power up The tagname can be changed onthe GLOS SYS screen WarmStrt Warm Start Power Up Mode Use Selection Remarks A 34 To select warm start power up mode UNIT CONF screen Sys Mode See Sys Mode KA075771 001 DIMENSION II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY WarpF ctr Warp Factor Use Determines the speed at which the programmer will execute when fast forward is enabled Selection CONF PRG screen 1 1000 Remarks f 2 is selected the program will run at twice its normal rate see FwdEnSrc WRITE Write to Memory Card Function Use To initiate writing a file to a memory card Selections UNIT screen Mem Card FUNC Remarks SeeFUNC Xon Xoff Xon and Xoff Use To select X on X off software handshaking Selections 232 PORT or422 PORT screen Enable or Disable Remarks Set to match your computer Zero Output Zero
203. ith Mechanical Relay Outputs we we a maximum of 2 bo MECHANICAL 8782 01 WEE o SSR ALTERNATE CONFIGURATION Voltage 102 264 VAC Frequency 47 63 Hz l Power 10 Watts typical Isolation Analog inputs on each analog input output card 1500VAC Analog outputs on each analog input output card 1500VAC Communications 1500VAC From AC mains 3500VAC Operating Modes Auto Manual Selected for each loop of control separately May be configured for simultaneous selection Run Hold Selected for each programmer separately May be configured for simultaneous selection Process Control Types Manual Control 0 0 to 100 0 percent reverse output and or 0 0 to 100 0 percent direct output Auto Control PID Parameters Five groups for each loop of control except Manual Reset Gain 0 0 to 200 0 Auto Reset 0 0 to 75 00 repeats per minute with anti reset windup Manual Reset 00 0 to 99 9 percent reverse and direct Rate 0 00 to 99 99 minutes Control Loops Number One to four control loops Programmer Capacities Number of Programmers One to four one programmer for each loop of control or one total Number of Segments 256 shared by all programmers or 750 shared segment programmer available Number of Events 12 programmed on a per segment basis Maximum Segment Time 99 hours Minimum Segment Time 0 1 second Segment Sequencing Forward or backward jumps with nested recycling Pro
204. k to the computer An ACK confirms that the request message has been received without error A NAK indicates that an error occurred and the request message should be retransmitted TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Fig B 5 Dimension II Serial Communications Message Sequence Request Message ACK or NAK DIMENSION fe ACK or NAK Once the request from the computer has been acknowledged the controller is ready to transmit the response message To request the response the computer transmits an ENQ control character upon receipt of which the controller trans mits the response message and then waits for an ACK or NAK from the com puter If the controller receives a NAK it automatically retransmits its response message up to four times After the fourth NAK the controller enters an idle state waiting for another STX Once a response message is received and acknowledged by the computer Dimension II is ready to receive another request message Network Mode Request and Response Message Formats Both request and response messages follow the same general format as illus trated in Fig B 8 The only difference is the structure of the data field The following paragraphs explain in detail each element of the format Fig B 6 Dimension II Serial Communications Optional Space Request Message e Station Format Address Data Field Checksum
205. key for on screen display of messages and operating instructions Two user programmable macro keys for simple one key activation of user defined command strings Serial communications RS 232 RS 422 and optionally and IEEE 488 Electronic storage of system configuration files and programs on com pact removable memory cards Supervisory control of multiple controllers via an optional PC based host software package such as Research Inc s Micrihost PC software package CSZ Dimension II Conventions In CSZ Dimension Il documentation and on screen instructions you will be instructed to enter various system commands and information with operator interface front panel controls The following conventions are used Operator interface display entries are printed in UPPER CASE CHARACTERS in the documentation Pressing the operator interface multi function knob has the same effect as pressing the Enter or Return key on a computer keyboard When you see press ENTER printed in an instruction press the knob to enter a selection or command into the system The operator interface multi function knob can be turned clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through or select information In the docu mentation CW clockwise and CCW counterclockwise The operator interface continuously displays a set of graphic icons on the right hand side of the screen The meanings of these graphic symbols are defined in section 2 of this manual The operator
206. king The network mode contains a full set of error codes Refer to table B 5 in this appendix for a listing and explanation of these codes Test Program We have written the test program found in Fig B 11 to test communications between a host computer and the Dimension II controller using Network mode This is not a complete communication driver program This program was IO REM FULL PROTOCOL COMMUNICATIONS TEST PROGRAM 20 O COM2 9600 N 8 1 RS CS DS FOR RANDOM AS 1 CARES EI CHR 3 C sd e E GOTO 140 GOTO 300 PEL PIT A 6 N PRINT ACK ASC 6 THEN PRINT 1 CHR 5 ASC 21 GOTO 250 ASC B 2 THEN PRINT STX ASC B 3 GOTO 220 ASC B 6 THEN PRINT B G Q CON ROLLER NO SENT CI RESPONSE FROM ECKSUM ERROR CONTROLLER NAK TA088002 001 B 17 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS System B 18 written using the Basic language and is compatible with QBASIC and GWBASIC The program changes loop setpoint to 10 and then prints the setpoint Cor rect output is displayed as follows ACK STX lt O1 gt ETXO3 ACK STX 912 1OETXO1 Test Program output Variable Data Access Access to Dimension II parameters via terminal or network communciations is accomplished using System Variables A System Variable is a two or three character abbreviation which correspo
207. knob to select the TOTALOVR field Select the desired number of overview displays to configure and use for operation Use the knob to select the OVSCREEN field Select the desired overview display title number 1 8 to configure Use the knob to select the FORMAT field Select the screen format from the available choices Horizontal Bar X Y Chart Vertical Bar 2 3 or 4 bar Text 1X 2X 3X When the format is selected and the system will display a configuration window for the selected format e noon A 4 35 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL UNir CONFIGURATION Fig 4 20 Overview Display Configuration Screen LS8TRRT1 CSTOP In the window select the parameters to be displayed on the Overview display as prompted Parameters include variables to be displayed high and low PV limits time base sample rate and up to four line definitions displayed text from table 4 4 The new configuration is now loaded in memory and should be saved onto a memory card Programmer Display Configuration The Programmer Display Configuration screen is used to select display charac teristics for programmer profile graphic displays These settings are the de faults that scale the profile graphic displays The settings can be modified on the profile graphic display when it is selected Set graphic display characteristics as follows 1 ak WON Use the diamond key to move to the Programmer Display Configu
208. l Pertaining to a circuit device or system that is operated by a person i e by hand More specifically one of two Dimension II controller modes in which the controller output in percent is set by the operator i e open loop control See also AUTOMATIC CONTROL and OPEN LOOP Manual Control MANUAL CONTROL operates on an OPEN LOOP basis i e the control signal is not adjusted automatically During manual control the control signal can be adjusted by the operator by changing the OUTPUT PERCENT value See also AUTOMATIC CONTROL MANUAL CONTROLLER CONTROL SIGNAL and OPEN LOOP Manual Reset A type of reset action that is available for automatic process control MANUAL RESET adds a user determined fixed percentage to the controller output Memory Card The MEMORY CARD is a memory module that plugs into the memory card port on the front panel of the Dimension II The amount of data stored is depen dent upon the card size e g 16 K or 32 K and the Dimension II model ordered e g 8705 or 8725 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 GLOSSARY Open Loop A process control signal path that forms an open circuit i e feedback is not used In open loop Manual control the operator adjusts the final control ele ment to send energy to the process for the result desired The result is not automatic and requires constant operator attention to correct for outside influ ences that t
209. lay icon and press the keypad once to the right to access Loop 2 display See Figure 3 Step 7 Tum the knob moving the cursor box to loop mode LpMode and press the knob to open the Loop Setup window Turn the knob moving the cursor to set point source SptSrc02 and press to change selection Tum the knob until remote appears and press the knob again to enter selection The initial setup is now complete Cascade loop tuning may now begin PART TEMP RECIPE LOOP 1 PRIMARY LOOP 2 SECONDARY Figure 4 Cascade Control Scheme PART TEMP RECIPE BLEND FACTOR RATIO FACTOR PRIMARY SECONDARY Figure 5 Blended Cascade Part Temperature Control Scheme Copyright 1991 Research Inc LOOP 1 O 12 58 25 PROCYROL 23 5 59 0 SETPhHTOL 50 0 ProcUrali SetPntai Keutut 1 DirOut l LeModeGi_ Ma Figure 3 Loop 1 Display CHAMBER OVEN FURNACE AIR TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE PART TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE CHAMBER OVEN FURNACE AIR TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE PART TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE D Page 2 Configuring Cascade Control USING THE MEMORY CARD Upon power up the Dimension Controller will be in the correct display to use the memory card If you are in another display scroll to the Operation side of the Dimen sion by pressing up on the diamond key until the RI icon is highlighted Press the diamond key left if you are not on the operation sid
210. ld length 8 might look like this we OOS 295 0A 35 03 If the PRINT command included text the response data includes that text For example the response data for the message PR The channel 2 setpoint is SP 2 might look like this The channel 2 setpoint is 10 0 PRINT Request Error Messages An error message indicates that the PRINT request message was unsuccessful The error message is an E followed by a four digit number The number identifies what was wrong with the request message e g a syntax error All error messages are listed in table B 5 in this B 19 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS B 20 appendix LET Commands For a LET command the data message contains the new system variable value preceded by an equals sign and enclosed in single or double quotation marks A LET command cannot include comment text Two examples are To enter a channel 2 setpoint of 59 6 LE SP 2 59 6 To enter a setpoint of 60 5 into both channels 1 and 2 SP 1 60 5 SP 2 60 5 Response Message to a LET Command If the response message is replying to a LET command either a pound sign or an error message follows the station address A response indicates that Dimension II has correctly executed a LET command LET Request Error Message An error message indicates that the LET request message was unsuccessful The error message is an E followed by a four digit number The num
211. le an entire communications network Dimension s processor updates a watchdog timer every 20 milliseconds If the timer is not updated after 40 milliseconds the watchdog is activated When the communi cations watchdog is activated the port 1 XMIT terminals are switched to high impedance i e the XMIT terminals are electrically removed from the network B 72 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS TA088002 001 B 73 Dimension ll Setup Guipes C 2 Dimension Il SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Dimension II Setup Guides General Operation Quick Start Quick Reference Setup Guides Alarm Configuration Autotune Bi Modal Control Calculating Inputs Cascade Control Memory Card Redundant Inputs Retransmit Staged Outputs Synchronized Programmer Time Proportioned Outputs KA075771 001 KA075727 001C General Operation Quick Start Getting started with the Model 8710 or 8751 Operator Interface is as easy as 1 2 3 Take your controller out of the box connect AC power to connector J7 on the control cage and plug it in You can connect your controller to any convenient AC power source from 85 264 VAC 47 63 Hz without having to make any adjustments HOT BLACK NEUTRAL WHITE GROUND GREEN 4 7 r amp Since the operator interface is an intelligent unit it will display screens with default values and tag names upon po
212. le settings on page 4 46 Mnemonic selects 3 character engineering mnemonic tag for the selected linear input Table 4 5 The Maximum Range of Numbers that can be used for Linear Input Zero Span and Decimal Point Placement 32767 32767 3276 7 3276 7 327 67 327 67 932 767 32 767 3 2767 3 2767 0 32767 0 32767 KA075771 001 4 43 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Calibrate The Calibrate window see Fig 4 26 allows the user to set up the hardware associated with the inputs to match some external voltage source It changes the offset Zero and gain Span of the hardware front end via software There are two approaches to analog input calibration Approach One Adjust the PV Bias setting to match with other equipment such as a chart recorder This is the most common calibra tion adjustment No external equipment voltage source or meter is needed Approach Two Adjust the Zero Span and ColdJunc settings to calibrate a specific type of input range This will calibrate an input to a specific sensor i e Type J thermocouple To proceed with recali bration a precision voltage millivoltage current or decade resistance CIdIncEnbI Enable d source is needed depending on the type of input to be calibrated SN D Lag eg Hl e ficseiineLese A Connect the calibration source to the analog input terminals to be calibrated See section 2 Fig 2 5a B Set CldJnc
213. lection n 4 Input OR Gate m Input Selection Alarms and contact inputs can be used as inputs to logic boxes to produce logical combinations The combined logical output from these boxes can be used to energize relay outputs operate controller programmer functions and turn control outputs off Several types of logic boxes are available The definition and use of the differ ent types are Con_Out Contact output assignment OutSet selections Allows four alarm conditions and or contact inputs to be logically OR d together to energize a contact relay output Logic Internal logic OR NOR AND NAND selections Allows four alarm conditions and or contact inputs to be logically combined OR NOR AND NAND to operate an internal logic point Out Off Control outputs off assignment OFFSet selections Allows four alarm conditions and or contact inputs to be logically OR d together to force all control outputs of the loop number specified by to off To configure the inputs of the logic boxes select the desired type and open the window to enter your input selections as illustrated in Fig 4 17 4 30 KA075771 001 Dimension I Series 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 Unit CONFIGURATION Output Configuration Each Analog I O Module has four analog outputs Each analog output may be configured for milliamp or voltage and also may be used in a time proportion ing mode to drive external relays Two low
214. lete If the operator wishes to accept these values YES is entered in the Accept field of the auto tune screen CalcRST Calculated Reset Use Selection Remarks Card Gel Card Select Use Selections KA075771 001 To display the PID Reset calculated by auto tuning None These values are only displayed after auto tune is complete If the operator wishes to accept these values YES is entered in the Accept field of the auto tune screen This field is used to configure which control output signal is to drive which hardware output port CONF OUT screen AnlgCrd1 TP Crd1 AnlgCrd2 TP Crd2 LocCOS 1 2 RmCOBrd 1 2 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks AnlgCrd1 refers to the four analog outputs on analog card 1 TP__Crd1 refers to the two time proportioning on analog card 1 AnigCrd2 refers to the four analog outputs on analog card 2 TP__Crd2 refers to the two time proportioned on analog card 2 Analog outputs can be used for control outputs pv or sp retransmits When selection pv or sp retransmits the output high and low limit must match the pv or sp range Time proportioned outputs can be used as time proportioned analog output or as a contact output The difference being the setting of the cycle time If the cycle time 0 the output acts as a contact output otherwise it is a TP output Contact outputs can be setup as either contact outputs or time proportioned
215. level digital outputs may be available on each I O card And the expansion remote Contact I O Modules provide up to eight contact outputs The digital and contact outputs may be configured as event logic or time proportioned output points The output configuration screen will automatically update the selections that are available based on the options you purchased with your Dimension II system Configure available analog and contact outputs as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Output Configuration CONF OUT Screen 2 Use the knob to select the CARD SEL field 3 Select the name of the output card type you want to configure see Fig 4 18 The available selections are AnlgCrd This selects the four analog outputs of Analog I O card 1 3 for configuration LocCo _ This selects the two digital outputs of Analog I O card for configuration Available ony if digital UO ordered and not the high speed communications expansion port RmCOBrd This selects the eight contact outputs of Remote Contact UO card Model 8781 for configuration 4 The system will display an output type assignment window 5 Usethe knob to select and enter the assignment desired for each output listed in the window The selections for analog outputs are shown in table 4 2 The selections for time proportioned and contact outputs are shown in table 4 3 6 Repeat this process for all analog time proportioned and contact
216. libration Dimension analog input processing provides high accuracy for thermocouple millivolt voltage milliamp and RTD sensor types Each Analog I O Card provides up to six universal analog inputs and up to three cards can be installed in a single control cage Configure and calibrate analog inputs as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move right to the UNIT_CNF screen down arrow to the Analog Input Configuration and Calibration icon The system will display the Analog Input Setup screen shown in Fig 4 26 2 Rotate the knob to select the INPUT NUMBER field Press knob to highlight that field Rotate knob to select the input number or tag name you wish to configure Press knob again to store that field Fig 4 26 Analog Input Calibration and Configuration R5C1 Analog Input Configuration Conf isura Log L in gero I 5 81 Lin Besb 1 mma Analog Input i Configuration Selections Analog Input alibration elections 4 42 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Un t CONFIGURATION 3 Tag names should be recorded on documentation forms as described in section 2 and may be changed as described in the Glossary tag names Configuration in this section 4 The system will display the currently active parameters and characteris tics for the analog input you selected Modify the analog input param eters and characteristics as follows INPTTYPE Selects analog input type from a list of sele
217. linear zero Lin Zero linear span Lin Span and linear decimal point position Lin Decp A three charac ter engineering unit s mnemonic may also be selected These parameters affect linear input ranges ONLY On the ANA OUTS screen selecting Configur will open a window which allows setting the zero and span See calibration instruc tions for more information A 30 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY Set Set Backlighting Mode Use To select the backlighting mode Selections Backlite On Off or Cycle Remarks Cycle causes the backlighting to turn on at the time set for On and off at the time set for Off See Backlite Control Loop Setpoint SetPnt Use Tagname for control loop Setpoint for loop 4 Selections OVIEW__ screens and LOOP XX screens Numeric Tagname Remarks Setpoint value to which the control will control The setpoint is setable by this field when the setpoint source SptSrc is set to Operator This tagname can be changed on the GLOS_LOP screen The tagname will be used throughout the unit Span Output Span Use Displays the span maximum value of an output Selections INPUTS or ANA OUTS screen SelecFunc Calibrate Numeric Remarks See calibration instructions for setup information SptSrc Control Loop Setpoint Source Use To select the source of the setpoint for a control loop Selections LOOP__ screen LpMode Operator Programr
218. loop response when Auto Tuning is calculating PID parameters Selections LpModeXX AutoTune SetParms Slow Medium Fast Remarks A Slow setting will have no overshoot and will take the longest to respond to a disturbance A Medium setting will have little or no overshoot but will take longer to respond A Fast setting will respond to a disturbance as quickly as possible with some overshoot Retrnsmt Retransmit Use To select a source that will be retransmitted by an analog output Selections CONF LOP AnlgIn01 AnlgInO6 Analn1 2 Analn3 4 Analn 5 6 Calc 1 Calc 2 Calc 3 Calc 4 RH SetPntL1 SetPntL4 Program1 Program8 Remarks The setup on this window refers to the selection of Retrans1 Retrans4 on the output configuration screen CONF OUT Setting up the Retrnsmt for loop 2 corresponds to the Retrans2 on the output configuration screen When retrans mitting a value that has limits other than 0 00 to 100 00 the zero and the span of the analog outputs should be adjusted to match those new limits RevOut_ Control Loop Reverse Output Use To access the control loop reverse output value for loop Selections OVIEW__ orLOOP_ screens LpMode 0 0 to 100 0 Remarks This field is only changable when the control loop is in manaul mode see LpMode A reverse output is usually used for heating KA075771 001 A 29 DiMENSION I SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY RmCOut Contact O
219. lso to download informa tion to Memory Image MI or Configuration Image C I PRINT format PR SS LET format LE SS X Field length 1 Value R I System Status SS indicates the current status of the functions R indicates functions are running functioning normally indicates idle or off line When downloading Memory Image MI or Configuration Image C change the SS status to When the downloading process is finished change the SS status back to R PRINT request PR SS PRINT response LET request LE SS R LET response SY System Screen Title Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the title of the system UNIT screen STAG format STAG SY CTAG format CTAG SY x where x is screen title Field length 8 Value See remarks Default screen title is UNIT STAG request STAG SY STAG response UNIT CTAG request CTAG SY UNIT1 CTAG response TCY Time Proportioning Cycle Time Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the time proportioning cycle time of a relay contact output on an analog I O card PRINT format PR TCY C where C is contact number LET format LE TCY C XXX where C is contact number XXX is number of seconds Field length 3 Value XXX 1 255 seconds Default dead start cycle time is 0 seconds output functions as non time proportioned contact output Range is 1 to 255 seconds PRINT request PR TC
220. ly Fig 2 20 Critical Alarm Window Critical Alarm Product Limit has exceeded min temPerature setting Fig 2 21 Critical Alarm Window ALARM HISTORY Screen The alarm history screen logs the six most recent alarms that have occurred in the system along with the date and time of day when the alarm became active Fig 2 21 This display is a read only display and can only be reset by performing a cold start and the system 2 23 CSZ Dimension ll User s Manual UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE CSZ DII Screen Map The following diagrams describe and illustrate CSZ Dimension ll Operation screens The four letters eg R3C1 above each screen in Figures 2 22 2 23 and 2 24 indicate the relative position of each screen in the operation screen map For example the CSZ Alarm Set screen titled ALM ser is labeled R2C2 to indicate its position as Row 2 Column 2 Fig 2 22 CSZ Dimension Il map of screens H larmsgf_No RlarmsoZ__ im it im it E 19e NonLatoh 5 4 C Bia asi ae S Ani ain 7 p Hin L 32767 E RTT AL 32767 Pl wi a 2 24 CSZ Dimension ll User s MaNuAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 24 CSZ Dimension map of Chamber screens R Ee A D E OBS AIR EL HUM PRESS cue DIL PRESS OMPRESCOR UN TIME STARTS STAG C STAG PI NS Q MPI de 3 putrut PAS i d MPR
221. ly when PID parameters are calculated At this time the PID parameters can be reviewed by rotating the knob right and moving the cursor box to RespTyp1 entry and selecting FAST MEDIUM or SLOW The PID parameters for the selected Response type will be displayed It is also possible at this time to change the entry for PIDGrp This is the PIDGrp where the PID parameters will be stored once they are accepted To accept the parameters the Accept entry should be selected to Yes Once this func tion is complete autotune will reset and be ready for another run If the parameters are not to be saved the autotune entry Abort can be selected and autotune will be reset and ready to run again Close windows NOTE The Autotune function requires that the control loop being autotuned be in Manual mode Any change in manual output during the autotuning run will gener ate an error and abort autotuning Anytime the selec tion of Abort is displayed for the autotune entry the autotuning run can be aborted If the user does abort an autotuning run the entry AT_ErrNo will display an error number 609 Copyright 1991 Research Inc 4 change PIDGrb i TuneHcti Reverse RespTuUPi Fast Close_Wn__CLOSE AutoTune TuneErr2 AT_ErrNo Accert__i No SamPles m PUchanSe Zz change PIBBGEBT TuneBct1i Reverse RespTup F ast Close Me CLOSE CSTART STOF te ERR APTUS UCAER ONLUS SCR RNDEN CSTART LSTOP 1 Figur
222. me position when a window is the OPEN functio called up in the display area see Fig 2 2 on the unction CURRENT TIME The current time is displayed in the right hand corner Current time is displayed in standard 24 hour HH MM SS format GRAPHIC ICONS For the CSZ screen and the Prod Limit screen the middle four icons Cond Sys Humid Aux Cool Purge act as indicating lights and are displayed in inverse video when that particular function is turned on The diamond key can select between the CSZ icon and the alarm icon only On all other screens the right hand side of the screen displays six graphic icons or symbols which represent various system functions The currently selected icon selectable with diamond key is displayed in inverse video MACRO KEY LABELS The bottom row of the screen always displays user definable labels for the two macro keys located directly below the screen DISPLAY AREA The contents of the screen currently called up is displayed in the display area shown in Fig 2 2 The location of the selector box when away from the home position is depicted by a graphic box or rectangle surrounding the currently selected data entry field or selection CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Graphic Icons and Screen Display Groups Menu Tree The CSZ Dimension II is divided into Operation and Configuration sections On the Operation side a user with limited access can view CSZ
223. mension Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Alarm Status Screen Help Message Configuration The Alarm Help Message Entry screen is used to enter help messages that will be displayed for specific alarms when the Help key is pressed at the Alarm Status screen Enter Alarm Status screen help messages as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Alarm Help Message Entry screen shown in Fig 4 25 2 Use the knob to select the ALM MESS field Select the loop name number for which you wish to enter a help message 4 The system will display a window in which you can enter a help message up to 95 characters in length 5 When you are finished entering your message move the selector box to the last field C and press ENTER e The message is now entered into memory and will be displayed when the help key is pressed with an alarm for this loop displayed on the Alarm Status screen Repeat this procedure to enter help messages for other loops and note that your new configuration can be saved onto a memory card Fig 4 25 Alarm Help Message Entry Screen CSTARTI STOP KA075771 001 4 41 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Input Output Configuration and Calibration UO setup screens are used to configure and calibrate Dimension Analog and Contact I O Module inputs and outputs Use these screens as described in the following paragraphs Analog Input Configuration and Ca
224. mension ll User s MaNUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 28 Passcode Access Window Enter Pae odee FULL 5 Turn the knob CW or CCW until the first two digits of your passcode are displayed 6 Press ENTER The second two digits of the passcode will be highlighted Enter the correct number and repeat this procedure for the final two digits 7 Press ENTER If your passcode entry is correct the system will display an ACCESS GRANTED message Note You may attempt to enter the correct Note If no passcodes are assigned the passcode as many times as you wish code defaults to 00 00 00 8 Close the window The system will now display the new access level in the access field You may now access functions and screens available under the access level you selected 2 30 CSZ Dimension ll User s MaNuAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE A slot is provided on the operator interface front panel for insertion of credit card sized memory cards Configuration control parameters and data can be retrieved from or stored on these cards Information that can be stored on Dimension Il memory cards includes Setpoint profile programs 1 8 Recipes Total memory image of Dimension Il Configuration and operational parameters Mem Img Display configuration DSP Conf e Macro key configuration Macroky User written CLC option programs basic Whenever you make changes to Dimension ll parameters or data the
225. mum output value Use of dead band ensures that transitions between reverse and direct output occur smoothly during automatic control Without dead band the controller may alternate between low levels of direct and reverse output due to electrical noise or minor variations in process deviation In some applications it may be and advantage to have an overlapping band where the reverse and direct outputs are both active for a specific level during the transition between reverse and direct modes Bi Modal Control A control arrangement that provides two outputs for two final control ele ments one output may be direct acting and one output may be reverse acting See also DIRECT ACTING CONTROL REVERSE ACTING CONTROL and BAND Bumpless Transfer A feature that prevents step changes in output when changing operating modes i e between MANUAL and AUTOMATIC Burnout Synonymous with Open Sensor In this manual sensor burnout is always referred to as Open Sensor See OPEN SENSOR Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY C Calibration The process of measuring and correcting the operation of an instrument in relation to a standard Cascade An arrangement of control loops where the setpoint of a loop may be deter mined by the output or other parameters of another loop s Cascade Control Cascade control works similar to automatic control except the setpoint is derived from the conditions of anoth
226. n The LEFT and RIGHT diamond keys are used to move horizontally from display to display The screens and functions accessible at each icon are as follows UNIT OPERATION Change date time enter passcodes change display screen contrast memory card operation set screen backlighting mode display time date of last power down power up and system mode warm start or cold start OVERVIEW DISPLAY S User defined Overview displays PROGRAM DISPLAYS Program Run and Build screens Program Options window Profile Display window LOOP DISPLAYS User Defined Loop display screens loop control windows loop auto tune windows LOGIC MONITOR DISPLAYS Logic point status display screens ALARM DISPLAYS Alarm Status and Limit Setting screens Unit Operation Screen 2 28 The following information and functions are available on the Unit Operations screen as shown in Fig 2 27 TimeOfDay Displays real time in standard 24 hour HH MM SS format User accessible Date Displays current date in standard MM DD YY format User accessible Access Displays current Access level FULL LIMITED NONE User accessible A window permits passcode entry Contrast Displays value 0 26 representing the current display contrast brightness level User accessible Mem Card Permits user to read from write to format delete files or read the directory of a memory card See the last topic in this section for detailed operation CSZ D
227. n Il maintenance and repair philosophy is based on unit replacement Do not attemp to perform troubleshooting or repair procedures that are not described in this section If you need assistance from Dimension technical support personnel call Dimension Il Technical Support Research Inc Minneapolis Minnesota 1 612 829 8317 Diagnostic Testing As shown in Fig 5 1 the Unit Configuration screen provides access to a Dimension ll self diagnostics functions The DIAGNOST field opens a series of windows used to display the current software version number and run diagnostic performance tests on both the control cage and operator interface components Run Dimension self diagnostics as follows 1 2 Use the diamond key to access the Unit Configuration screen Fig 5 1 Turn the knob CW until the selector box moves to the DIAGNOST field Press ENTER The system will display the Diagnostics window shown in Fig 5 2 This window provides access to the control cage and operator interface diagnostic test functions To initiate control cage diagnostics move the selector box to the CC_DIAG_RUN field and press ENTER Dewewsion H Series 8700 User s Manyak Lut CONFIGURATION Fig 5 1 Unit Configuration Screen r ordi MacrokUd2 Fig 5 2 Dimension Diagnostics Window CC Diag Bun Close Wn CLOSE pt ion Enter Ktion 2 Enter 5 The system will check the status and version number of CPU B725 and Ol CPU C
228. n for Ready To Send RTS is a handshaking signal used in the RS232 protocol to coordinate digital communications See also RS 232 CTS and HANDSHAKING KA075771 001 E 15 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY E 16 Setpoint The desired value of the process variable Setpoint Programmer A device that follows prescribed program for generating a setpoint signal The setpoint signal is inputted to a process controller to provide programmed control of a process variable Shielded Line Line or circuit that is shielded from external electric or magnetic induction In the Dimension II manual SHIELDED LINE refers to a wire enclosed within a conducting sheath See also COMMON MODE GUARD and SHIELDING WIRE Shielding Wire The conducting sheath which surrounds a SHIELDED LINE See also SHIELDED LINE Signal Conditioner A device which performs scaling and arithmetic functions Some examples are square root extractors summers multiplier dividers and scalers Software Revision Level A series of numbers which identify the type of software stored in the Dimen sion II The SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL appears in the Dimension Us operator interface during power up or under the diagnost entry under the Unit Configuration Icon on the Operator Interface See also COLD START Span The difference between the upper and lower range values of the process vari able Defined by the limits of the controller
229. n the configuration window Span Displays the span value setup in the configuration window e CyclTime Selects the cycle time in seconds If the cycle time is set to O this output will function as a analog proportional output If the cycle time is set to any value greater than O this output will function as a time proportioning output See section 2 for information on setting jumpers for time proportioning relay drive KA075771 001 4 49 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Note on Decimal position ofanalog outputs The analog outputs normally have 2 decimal points when usedinacontrolloop The span zero underthe ANA_OUTS Configurwindow will also have 2 decimal points The inputdecimalpositions have no effecton outputs when usedas the controlloop output Butwhenretransmitting a SP PV Profile or Calc_X the output decimal position and output Span Zero will follow the decimal position ofthe value being retransmitted r 1 Example PV 1 is a linear input with 3 decimal points Analog output 1 is set to retransmit this input the analog output value and Span Zero values under the ANA OUTS screen Configur window will also have 3 decimal points r 1 Example Retransmit an analog input with a range of 900 1500 F to a 4 20 mA analog output Zero 1500 900 1500 x 100 40 00 Span 100 00 L E CAUTION The input types and retransmit configuration should be set up BEFORE the
230. nalog output that has been configured via jumpers to function as a time proportioned output PRINT format PR AC Y L where L is loop number LET format LE ACY L XXX where L is loop number XXX is number of seconds Field length 3 Value XXX 1 255 seconds Default dead start cycle time is 0 seconds output functions as non time proportioned analog output Range is 1 to 255 seconds PRINT request PR ACY 1 B 25 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS AGP Alarm Group Purpose Use Remarks Examples PRINT response 000 LET request LE ACY 1 10 LET response To view or change the settings of an entire alarm group PRINT format PR AGP L G where L is loop number and G is group number LET format LE AGP L G A B C D E F G H where Lis loop G is group and A is Hi Hi Process Variable alarm limit B is Lo Lo Process Variable alarm limit C is Hi Process Variable alarm limit D is Lo Process Variable alarm limit E is Hi Hi Deviation alarm limit F is Lo Lo Deviation alarm limit G is Hi Deviation alarm limit H is Lo Deviation alarm limit Field length 71 Each Dimension II control loop has five groups of values available to determine HiHiPvLmt HiPvLmt LoLoPvLmt LoPvLmt HiHiDevLmt HiDevLmt LoLoDevLmt and LoDevLmt group range is 1 to 5 When changing those values all eight positions must have a number even if all the numbers are the same value
231. nd lo limits of the profile display on PROGRUN screens Selection DCON_PRG screen 1 to 5 Remarks The decimal position will change both the hi and lo limits of the profile display which is selected on the PgBuild window of the PROGRUN screens DecPoint Decimal Point Position Use To display the current number of decimal point positions for linear inputs Selection INPUTS screen Configure 0 5 Remarks The parameter will display O or 1 for all thermocouple and RTD inputs If a linear input type is selected the number of decimal point positions can be user configured see SelcFunc DELETE Memory Card Delete Function Use To delete a file from a memory card Selection Mem Card Delete Remarks See FUNC Note Memory Card must be inserted forthis to appear Dev 7H Control Loop Deviation Use To display the control loop deviation from setpoint for control loop Selection None Remarks The deviation is calculated by subtracting the setpoint from the process vari able PV SP DEV Diagnost Diagnostics Use To run basic diagnostics of Dimension Il Selection UNIT CNF screen Diagnost Remarks Opens a window to run diagnostics on the operator interface and the control cage KA075771 001 A 11 Dimension Il SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY DIRECT Memory Card Directory Function Use To list a directory of memory card files Remarks See FUNC Note Memory Card must b
232. nds to a certain parameter in the Dimen sion II In addition many system variables take a numeric subscript sur rounded by parentheses which specifies a specific member of a group of pa rameters For example the system variable for a setpoint is SP and it takes a subscript which indicates the channel for which it is used The full variable name would then be SP x where x is a number from 1 to 8 Other system variables take no subscripts and some take two The System Variable Descrip tions section of this appendix lists and describes all Dimension II system vari ables in alphabetical order System Variable Commands There are five valid commands for accessing system variables PRINT Read a system variable LET Write a system variable LIST Display possible values for a system variable STAG Show the Tagname of a system variable CTAG Change the Tagname of a system variable The PRINT LET and LIST commands may be shortened to just two letters PR LE LI but the STAG and CTAG commands may not be truncated All com mands must be in capital letters and if a command is not specified LET is assumed Each command is explained further below PRINT Commands TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL TA088002 001 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS When using a PRINT command you may either print only the desired system variable s or you may print both text and the desired system variables The followi
233. ng the diamond key up to highlight the RI icon gt Press right to switch to the Configuration side Thetitle ofthe Unit Configurationscreen UNIT CNF willbe shown inthe upper left hand side of the display See Figure 1 Press the diamond key up until the RI icon X is highlighted and then press the key left one time Note A pass code may be required if the unit is not in full access Step 2 Access the Loop Configuration screen CONF LOP This is done by pressing the diamond key down two times to highlight the Configuration icon BE Press right one time The Loop Configuration screen will appear See Figure 2 Cha Lull Qu 1kkeul Quikkeu2 _ CSTARTI CSTOP Figure 1 Unit Configuration Display Cascade Control Setup Guide Step 3 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to loop number Loop_Num Change this entry to LoopNm02 by pressing the knob and turning until loop 2 entry appears Press the knob again to enter Wait one moment for the loop 2 default entries to appear on the screen Step 4 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to remote setpoint source RemSpsrc and press the knob A second window will open for display Change the displayed entry to OUTPUTL1 by turning the knob right until OUTPUTL1 appears Press the knob to enter A con figuration tree will appear This configuration tree will allow you to select the profile to be used the cascade param eters and the blending of one or two inputs int
234. ng two examples use a PRINT command consisting of only the desired system variable s e To monitor the channel 2 setpoint PR SP 2 e To monitor the channel 2 setpoint and deviation PR SP 2 DV 2 The following two examples use a PRINT command with both text and the variables e PR The channel 2 setpoint is SP 2 PR Setpoint 2 is SP 2 Deviation 2 is DV 2 Response Message to a PRINT Command When the response message is replying to a PRINT command either a data message or an error message follows the station address There are no spaces in a response message except those re quired by the system variable field length error message or spaces in comment text included by the user A response message contains the system variable information requested by a PRINT command In addition any comment text included in the request message will be returned in the response message Each system variable has a field length Any unused characters in the field length are transmitted as spaces in the response message For example the field length for the setpoint is eight characters If the setpoint data requested is 10 0 the data response message would look like this CEPS TED where one space If the PRINT command is concatenated the response data is also linked to gether For example the response data for setpoint field length 8 reverse output field length 8 loop status field length 1 and process variable fie
235. nications Configuration 4 54 KA075771 001 4 1 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Section 4 Unit Configuration What is Configuration Configuration is the name used to describe the process of setting up the Dimen sion II for your application In other words Configuration is choosing and selecting specific options and features you want to use from the lists of avail able functions How is Configuration Accomplished The Dimension II may be configured using the operator interface The follow ing paragraphs provide the information required to accomplish configuration The Dimension II may also be configured using the JumpStart program on the floppy disk included with your controller The JumpStart program is software that can be installed on your PC to create a custom Dimension II controller configuration for your specific application JumpStart turns your PC into an easy to use powerful tool to accomplish the configuration process Please refer to the JumpStart User s Manual for instructions on how to load and use the program This section explains how to personalize the Dimension II to suit your spe cific operating environment and control scheme using the operator interface Refer to section 3 for process control operation instructions The following topics are included in this section Before you configure Moving around the configuration screens Configuration screens overv
236. nimum of 500 samples during the length of the RespTime Ifan AT ErrNo occurs select this entry to get a description of the error number If errors 604 or 605 occur it is possible that the RespTime is too short or the output is not configured or connected properly The PVchange entry should be moni tored for a response The autotuning algorithm will begin to calculate the amp change entry after 100 samples This entry gives an indication of the nearness to completion for the autotuning algorithm It is calculated by taking the difference of the last 50 samples and comparing that to the overall PVchange When it reaches 1 the autotuning algorithm will complete by calculating the PID parameters Upon startup the autotuning algorithm will attempt to allocate enough memory to take a maximum of 2048 samples The amount of memory allocated may be less depending on system use It is therefore recommended that only one loop at a time be in the autotuning mode to give it enough memory to complete The memory will be returned for system use upon the completion of the autotuning run If the number of samples taken fills the memory allocated an AT ErrNo of 608 will be generated The autotuning algorithm will still calculate PID parameters on this error and complete as though a normal run was completed Step 4 Accepting the PID parameters See Figure 6 The entries Samples PVchange and 6 change will changeto CalcGain CalcRST and CalcRate respective
237. nput one and two If input one is 360 and input two is 340 then the formula will be 360 x 1 340 x 1 2 The result will be 350 for the process variable Step 1 This step will access the appropriate screen Ac cess the configuration side of the Dimension Controller by pushing the diamond key up until the RI icon is highlighted Press the diamond key right and then push down until the Process Configuration icon is highlighted Press the key right now until the Loop Configuration CONF_LOP screen appears See Figure 1 Step 2 This step will select calculated input as the process variable source Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to PVsource and press the knob A second window will open to display options The cursor box will appear with Anlgin01 selected Press the knob and turn the knob right until Calc 1 appears Press the knob to enter selection A second window will appear Note An open sensor on any loop will cause a CALC value to read open sensor Copyright 1992 Research Inc Calculating Inputs Setup Guide CSTART I Figure 1 Loop Configuration Screen Step 3 This step will define the calculation equation Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to Equation and press the knob A third small window will appear at the top of the screen Press the knob and tum to select multi plier value Press the knob to enter selection Turn the knob right moving to the next equation value that
238. nse 02 NM2 RS 232 Network Terminal Mode Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To view or change the protocol network terminal mode used for RS 232 communications PRINT format PR NM2 LET format LE NM2 7 X where X is mode Field length 8 Terminal mode Terminal Network mode Network PRINT request PR NM2 PRINT response Terminal LET request LE NM2 Network B 49 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications narameters are chanoed NM4 RS 422 Network Terminal Mode Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the protocol network terminal mode used for RS 422 communications PRINT format PR NM4 LET format LE NM4 X where X is mode Field length 8 Terminal mode Terminal Network mode Network PRINT request PR NM4 PRINT response Terminal LET request LE NM4 Network LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications v NP Number of Programmers Purpose Use Remarks Examples Io monitor the number of programmers in a controller PRINT format PR NP Field length 2 Value XX Dimension II units have 1 to 8 programmers PRINT request PR NP PRINT response 04 NS
239. nsion ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Logic Display Configuration The Logic Display Configuration screen and several support windows are used to select events and logic points that will be displayed on Dimension II Logic displays Two screens are provided with the factory default configuration Up to three screens may be selected and configured Build Dimension II Logic displays as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Logic Display Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 24 2 Use the knob to select the NUMLGSCR field 3 Selectthe desired number of logic displays 1 3 Fig 4 24 Loic DISHEY DCON_LOG O 87 11 15 Configuration Screen Lo dicScr__LOGIC__i TextEnty_i T EXT Num oecr 82 CSTARTI CSTOP 4 5 6 7 eo Use the knob to select the LOGICSCR field Select the desired logic display title number Use the knob to select the TEXTENTY field Press ENTER twice The system will display a window from which you can select up to 12 lines of text that will display selected events and or logic points Select the event or logic point that will be displayed on each text line After each selection select the set of terms that best describes the on off state of the event or point e g ON OFF START STOP ENABLE DISABLE These terms are listed and can be redefined on the GLOS IO screen The new configuration is now loaded in memory and can be saved onto a memory card 4 40 KA075771 001 Di
240. nter the correct passcode in the window When you close the window the current access level will be displayed Important To remove passcode protection from the NONE or LIMITED level you must first enter the correct passcode in the ACCESS field on the Unit Operation screen You must then access the Unit Configuration screen and enter six zeros 00 00 00 into the passcode field Passcode protection will then be removed from the system and FULL access will be allowed Defining Macro Keys The labels and functions of the two macro keys located directly below the display screen may be redefined at any time during operation With these keys you have the ability to simplify operation by redefining each key to perform a selectable function for a specific loop Macro key labels are displayed on the bottom row of all screens Configure macro key labels and functions as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Unit Configuration icon The system will display the Unit Configuration screen shown in Fig 4 8 2 Use the knob to select the MACROKY1 field 3 The system will display the macro key Setup window shown in Fig 4 8 4 Use the knob to select the LPPGNMBR field Select the desired loop programmer combination 5 To rename the key select the START field The selector box will highlight the first character field of the 8 character macro key label Note Each macro key labelcan consistofup to eightcharacters All
241. nto a memory device Typically the WRITE PROTECTION feature can be turned on and off by the user WRITE PROTECTION is used as a safeguard when entering new data can erase existing data The Dimension II Memory Card includes a WRITE PROTECTION feature that is activated by a switch on the card See also Memory Memory Card E 18 KA075771 001
242. o an output todetermine the loop 2 setpoint Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to cascade parameters CascParm If you press the help key at this time the following equation is displayed output Ratio Setpoint Blend Scale Factor The formula is included in the help system to serve as a guideline during operation Press the help key again to close the window Press the knob to open a third small window that will allow changes to be made to the Ratio Blend and Scale Factor settings Turn the knob one time and press to select Ratio Turn the knob to change ratio value and press the knob again to enter The ratio setting is used to determine the percentage of output from loop 1 When divided by the Scale Factor the ratio will become the setpoint for loop 2 Tum the knob right to scroll through blend factor and scale selections using the same proce dure described for ratio to change scale and blend values pop ree RemSPsrc__ Buto Man M OutsSnroc HlarmBct mJDuoounuuotun 2mo55m s 23o0 D 0 lt 5 53 m u207575 Duouc mT D Dres rar 2 etzen tu Gerd e S aM vd D ct 5 sch n a CSTART STOP Figure 2 Loop Configuration Display Step 5 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to END and press the knob Press the diamond key up twice to highlight the Ri icon and press left once to access the operation side of the Dimension Controller Step 6 Press the diamond key down tothe Loop Disp
243. o move the cursor box Press knob to select the parameter Rotate the knob to select the number of seconds from 1 to 255 for the cycle time and press the knob again to enter Follow the steps described above for TP OUTS and CON OUTS configuration as required These screens are accessed by pressing the diamond key right See Figures 5 and 6 NOTE A value of 0 disables time proportioning and any non zero value enables it SelcFunc Con zero SPa ee CyclT me 00 CuclT ime 050 Conf idur___TP_Outs ConOutPpt__CON_OUTI1 CuclTime 3801 CSTARTI STOF Figure 6 Contact Output Configuration Screen Page 2 Time Proportioned Outputs CALCULATING INPUTS The Dimension Controller provides the ability for the pro cess variable to be derived from a calculation This may provide increased control that a direct reading from a sensor cannot provide For example in a large furnace we may find the upper area of the furnace is warmer than the middle or lower areas Placing two thermocouples in the same zone and averaging their temperatures may improve the process control Up to four analog inputs may be averaged Formula for Calculation Anigin01 x Mult01 AniginO2 x Mult02 Anigino3 X Mult03 Anlgin04 x Mult04 Scale All multipliers are set to zero and the scale is set to 100 at the factory There are two identical calculated inputs available CALC_1 and CALC_2 Using the example above we will average analog i
244. o recycling Any other entry will cause the program to continue executing a looping series of segments for the numbers set for recycle After the number of recycles is completed the programmer will increment to the next sequential segment REF Reference Marker Use To move Reference marker on XYCHARTS Selection OVIEW XX Numeric Remarks The Reference marker on the right side of the vertical axis is a means to get a more accurate reading of the XYCHART trends RemSegXX Remote Start Segment Use To access the starting segment to be used when a remote start is initiated Selections CONF PRG screen RemStart Run Start 1 to 255 option to 749 Remarks See RemStart RemSPsrc Remote Setpoint Source Use To select a source to be used for the setpoint when the setpoint source SptSrc is set to the remote mode Selections CONF LOP screen AnlglIn01 AnlgIn06 Program1 Program4 OutputL 1 OutputL4 SetPnt1 SetPnt4 Remarks There are three different types of inputs that can be used as the remote setpoint source analog inputs programmer profile outputs or control loop outputs One reason for using analog inputs for the remote setpoint source could be to use an external potentiometer to manual setpoint the Dimension ll Program mer profile outputs can be used to synchronize loops that are running the same profile Control loop outputs are used for a cascade configuration When using cascade in the Dimension II t
245. o start at a starting segment select the recipe which automatically selects the starting segment of the recipe and to start the program Time segment for programmer 01 Displays time into segment Time left for programmer 01 Displays time left in the entire recipe Program setpoint for programmer 01 Displays program setpoint By selecting this parameter a window will be opened allowing the operator to change the setpoint for loop 1 or loop 2 Current segment for programmer 01 Displays the number of the current segment Cycle count for programmer 01 Displays the number of program mer recycles remaining When recycles are programmed in and CycCnt counts to zero the programmer will move to the next numeric segment from the current segment Alarm group for programmer 01 Displays the currently active alarm group 1 5 Alarm Group 2 is recommended for Guaran teed Soak operation PID Grp1 PID group for program PROGFELUNHI O 12 49 G4 mer01 Not Active Cur Sedi Cuccntiai Alm_Grrei PID Grp Euntz PerBu ild CSTARTI Evnts Events for programmer 01 Displays which of 12 external events are currently on 1 9 a c PgOption Program options Dis plays options such as time of day start time of week start remote setpoint source etc Build i PgBuild Program build Opens a window where the operator can build STOP x a ramp soak temp RH profile PROGRAMMER OPERATION Fig 3 3 Program Run
246. ob and tum the knob again to scroll through output selections To select the output to be calibrated press the knob again Turn the knob right moving the cursor box to SelcFunc Press the knob and turn right orleft to select configuration or calibration Select Calibrate and press the knob to enter The Calibrate Outputs screen will appear See Figure 4 Step 5 The calibration zero and span values calibrate the output to provide the correct voltage or current output To calibrate connect a volt meter to the appropriate rear terminals see Figure 2 2 in the Dimension User s Manual and adjust the span and zero values When complete save your calibration setting by turning the knob right to SaveAban and press the knob Turn the knob to select either save or abandon if you wish to revert to the original settings Press the knob to enter selection Step 6 In our example on the front page zero would be set to 1000 and the span to 1000 This step is required for all types of retransmit Process variable setpoint and deviation Process variable and setpoint retransmit would be set to O and 1000 For deviation if 100 and 100 are selected then full and zero output signal is achieved at 100 and 100 deviation Turn the knob moving the cursor box to SelcFunc again and press the knob Change the selection to Configure and press the knob An embedded widow will appear see figure 5 Change the zero and span value by tuming the knob and pres
247. ogram Recipe Build Screen When PGBUILD is selected at the Program Run screen the Recipe Build window shown in Fig 3 5 is displayed Fig 3 5 Recipe Build Window CSTARTI STOF 1 Move the selector box to the SlectPg field and select the recipe 1 8 that you wish to build or modify The currently active parameters for the recipe you selected will be displayed Build or modify the recipe as follows Start Seg Displays the start segment number for the selected recipe Segment Select segment number 001 through 255 Segment 000 is dedicated to serve as a recipe abort function After a recipe abort using this segment the recipe will restart at the point where it stopped Note For running a program the setpoint source must be set to programmer For single setpoint operation set to operator 3 5 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Note The Dimension II is set up to have 8 recipes and a pool of 255 segments Each recipe has a starting segment 0 255 and a block of segments the operator sets aside for it It is the responsibility of the operator to set the correct starting segments and allocate sufficient seg ments to not overlap the succeeding recipes For example use the follow ing grid to set up your profiles Number of Recipe Starting Allocated Segments or Name Segment Segments Go To From 1 20 1 19 20 39 40 74 75 124 125 159 160 199 200 219 220
248. ogrammer 1 to control loops 1 and 2 we ll call them Temperature and Humidity through a three segment recipe which ramps up soaks for a while then ramps back down We assume a few things here to make the example simpler A The Network communications mode is used but we will leave out the mechanics of the protocol STX address ETX checksum The commands shown will work via either the RS 232 or RS 422 ports B Correct tuning parameters have already been set for loops 1 and 2 If you wish to set tuning parameters over the network see the description of the PID Group parameter C Loops 1 and 2 are configured to take their setpoints from programmer 1 Each loop should have its Setpoint Source SptSrc set to Programr and its Remote Setpoint Source RemSPsrc set to Program 1 For help in configuring them as such see Section 3 under Loop Control and Section 4 under Control Loop Configuration The description of the SPS parameter in this appendix is also helpful D Programmer 1 is configured to be started by the operator Dimension II considers a start command from the network using the PS system vari able as an Operator start The CONF_PRG screen for programmer 1 should have the OPStart field set to OPStrtO1 For help on this see Setpoint Programmer Configuration in Section 4 Starting a setpoint program requires several steps via the network just as it does via the Dimension II operator interface Step 1 Place t
249. ontact NO and Analog UC boards installed in the Control cage and then will display the status window shown in Fig 5 3 Press ENTER to close the window 6 Toinitiate operator interface diagnostics move the selector box to the Ol DIAG RUN field and press ENTER 7 The system will display the version number of the operator interface board Use the KEYPD and KNOB fields Fig 5 4 to check dia mond key and knob directional functions Move the selector box to CLOSE field and press ENTER to close the window 5 3 Dimension I Senes 8700 User s Manus Unser CONFIGURATION Fig 5 3 Control Cage Test Status Window CPU_Brd1__ UO DntactO1 UO4 04 Cntact0e _U04 04 AnaBrd01__ _U04 04 AnaBrdOe_ _ Not Found AnaBrdO3 Mat Found Close Wn Poel Fig 5 4 Operator Interface Tesi Status Window Knob RIGHT Close VN CLOSE Enter E nter Help Messages On some Dimension operator interface display screens help messages are displayed that will tell you how to proceed or how to correct an error Also pop up help windows can be called up at most screens and fields by pressing the Help key 2 When a help window is displayed press the Help key a second time or the knab ta make the window disappear 5 4 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL UNIT CONFIGURATION Input Fluctuation Conditions The Dimension user may find with some applications the analog inputs connected to the Dimension to be unst
250. ontrol loop In manual mode the amount of output can be set by the operator Amount of output for humidity loop In manual mode the amount of output can be set by the operator Amount of output for de humidify loop In manual mode the amount of output can be set by the operator The deviation of the temperature setpoint from the pro cess variable The deviation of the relative humidity setpoint from the process variable Selects whether a Hy Cal RH probe is being used Parameters are read only User cannot change DE HUMD DEV TEMP DEV RH HumidSel CSZ Dimension I User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE 2 12 Stage 1 Screen The Stage 1 Screen is an informational screen only It displays the stage 1 compressor information including Fig 2 9 AIR TEMP REL HUM HI PRESS LO PRESS DISCHRGE OIL PRESS RUN TIME STARTS T OUTCUR T OUTPRE Fig 2 9 Stage 1 Screen Displays the air temperature reading in the chamber from a thermocouple located in the air stream at the discharge of the plenum Displays the percentage of relative humidity reading from a sensor located in the air stream at the discharge of the plenum Displays the refrigeration high pressure reading taken from the transducer PT1 located on the discharge side of the compressor A backup mechanical pressure switch is also installed for protection of the compressor Displays the refrigeration low pressure read
251. op requirement and not made a concern for the user when building the Recipes Alarm Groups Selecting Alarm group 1 5 can be made on a segment per segment basis The typical use is to switch to different limits at various times in the Recipe Usu ally to activate or deactivate a Guaranteed Soak function Alarm Groups will only become active if selected in the program segment and value are set for the alarm in the desired alarm group See Alarm Settings for entry 3 18 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Guaranteed Soak Uses Hi and Lo Deviation alarms to put the programmer into Hold allowing the process to catch up with a change in setpoint By switching alarm groups tight and wide alarm limits can be activated at diffferent segments of the pro gram The use of Guaranteed Soak will speed up the test cycle and still main tain correct times for the soak period 3 19 PROGRAMMER OPERATION View a Recipe Fig 3 14 X Y Graph Display 3 20 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Display Profile When first called up the text based Recipe Build screen displays default segment 001 parameters in tabuiar form During the recipe building process a window displaying an X Y graph of the current state of the recipe can be called up by using the DISPLAY selection As shown in Fig 3 14 this window dynamically displays the setpoint recipe to ensure proper recipe entry As the recipe develops the graphic p
252. or each channel Each process alarm acts by controlling one or more user assigned relay drive signals See also HI PV HI HI PV LO PV LO LO PV HI DEV HI HI DEV LO DEV LO LO DEV and OPEN SEN SOR ALARM Process Variable A process quantity property or condition that is measured Common process variables are temperature pressure and rate of flow thickness and speed Profile The Profile is a setpoint value that changes as a function of the programmer time base elapsed time Programmer For the Dimension II the PROGRAMMER is a feature that determines the process SETPOINT and EVENT values during a specified period of time based on user entered parameters Proportional Band PB A measure of the amount of proportional control action provided by a process controller The PROPORTIONAL BAND value indicates the range of deviation values within which a change of deviation causes a change in the controller output By definition 100 percent PB is the situation where deviation is 100 percent and output is 100 percent The PROPORTIONAL BAND limits are reached when the controller output is either fully on or fully off PB INPUT in Percent OUTPUT in percent The GAIN parameter adjusts the PROPORTIONAL BAND to match the process under control Note that the GAIN value is equal to the inverse of the PRO PORTIONAL BAND value GAIN OUTPUT in Percent INPUT in percent With a wide PROPORTIONAL BAND low GAIN the controller o
253. or message is an E followed by a four digit number The number identifies what was wrong with the request message e g a syntax error All error messages are listed in table B 5 in this appendix CTAG Commands For a CTAG command the data message contains the new system variable tagname preceded by an equal sign and enclosed in single or double quotation marks The new tagname MUST have a length of 8 characters Some examples To change the channel 1 process variable tagname CTAG PV 1 Tempratr To change the channel 2 setpoint tagname CTAG SP 2 Target e To change the first macro key title CTAG MC1 2 RUN 7 where one space New tagnames will appear on Dimension II operator interface screens as soon as a new screen is displayed Response Message to a CTAG Command If the response message is replying to a CTAG command either a pound sign or an error message follows the station addresss A response indicates that the Dimension has correctly executed the CTAG command CTAG Request Error Message An error message indicates that the CTAG request message was unsuccessful The error message is an E followed by a B 23 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS four digit number The number identifies what was wrong with the request message e g a syntax error All error messages are listed in table B 5 in this appendix System Variable Descriptions Table B 4 lists all D
254. or the analog output you selected Modify analog output parameters and characteristics as follows SelcFunc Selects the analog output configuration function or the analog output calibration function Each function opens a window Configur Opens a window to allow setting the output zero and span values Each 0 5V or 0 20 mA analog output configuration defaults to Zero 000 Span 100 00 For 4 20 mA output the configuration defaults to Zero 2500 Span 100 00 r q Example A 4 to 20 mA output An output of 0 00 gives 4 mA out An output of 100 00 gives 20 mA out Slopes CAN be negative inverted Zero 100 00 Span 0 00 An output of 0 00 gives 20 mA out An output of 100 00 gives 4 mA out E E Also see the example on page 4 52 for configuration staged outputs Change SelcFunc to Calibrate See Fig 4 27 Calibrat Opens a window to allow setting the zero and span calibration points see Fig 4 27 These points are different from the Ca ium e ipo par zero and span in the configure window The calibration zero and span CuelTime 880 values calibrate the output to provide the correct voltage or current out To calibrate connect a volt meter to the appropriate terminals and adjust the span and zero values When complete save your calibration settings by selecting save If you wish to revert to the original settings select abandon Close WN Close Zero Displays the zero value setup i
255. orithm will attempt to model a process by monitoring the process response to a step input to the process Once the PID parameters are calcu lated the operator can select the type of response desired namely FAST MEDIUM or SLOW The FAST selection is designed to give a quarter amplitude damped response and the SLOW response is critically damped This setup guide uses loop 1 as an example Step 1 Prior to starting autotune it is necessary to set some parameters for the autotuning run Go to the con figuration side of the Dimension Press the diamond key down and highlight the Process Configuration icon D Press the diamond key once right The Configuration Loop CONF LOP screen will appear See Figure 1 On the CONF LOP screen select TUNE by turning the multi purpose knob right moving the cursor box Press the knob to select tune The autotune configuration window will open The parameters in this window have the fol lowing functions Reverse Direct Set control loop action RespTime Set the estimated response time of the process Units are in minutes Bump Set the amount the output that will be bumped PIDGrp Selects the PID group that the PID parameters will be saved to Fast MediunVSlow Selects the PID parameters to give the desired response gordo mm ERU j d STRRT CSTOP Figure 1 Loop Configuration Screen The PIDGrp Reverse Direct and the Fast Medium Slow selections can be changed on the autotune run window
256. ormation is stored on the memory card in the file type DspConf_ Note that if Output Lx is selected for the remote source the cascade parameters should be set to allow the proper ranging of the output Refer to RemSpsrc section for accessing the cascade parameters To display and set the backlighting mode Backlite See Backlite and Set OI Diag Operator Interface Diagnostics Use Selections Remarks To select Operator Interface diagnostics UNIT_CNF screen Diagnost Opens a window The diagnostics displays the software revision level The keypad and knob can also be tested See Keypd and Knob On Off On Off Tagnames Use Selection Remarks On Backlighting On Use Selection Remarks Opens a window to allow changing the tagnames used for on and off states GLOS O screen 8 characters Four pairs of on off names can be selected These names can be assigned to contact inputs contact outputs and programmed events on the DCON LOG screen To display and set the backlighting mode Backlite See Backlite and Set OPStart Operator Program Start Use Selections KA075771 001 This field is used to select the source for starting a programmer via the operator start CONF PRG screen OPStrt01 OPStrt04 OR set 01 04 NORset 01 04 RemcCI 1 8 ANDset 01 04 NANDset 1 4 A 21 DiMENSION I SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks The OPStrt01
257. output configured span and zero are set to match the input hi and low limits since the decimal position ofthe analog outputs does not change until the Retransmit parameter is set under the CONF LOP screen and the param eter to be retransmitted is set under the CONF OUT screen 5 Usethe diamond key to move to the LOC OUTS local contact outputs see Fig 4 28 Use the knob to select the LocCO Nm field Select the number of the local output you wish to configure Modify local contact output parameters and characteristics as follows CyclTime Sets the cycle time in seconds If the cycle time is set to 0 this output will function as a on off output If the cycle time is set to any value greater than O this output will function as a time proportioning output Configur Opens a window to select the zero and span values for this local contact output see Fig 4 28 4 50 KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 28 Time Proportioning Output Configuration iCuclTime 08080 SA Mee STEEN Ei Time Proportioning Output LocCO Nm LocCO1_i C clT me 888 Conf igur__LocCoOuts ps OUT SE 12 32 LOC LocCO Nm LocCO1_1 E Time Proportioning Output KA075771 001 4 51 Fig 4 29 Contact Output Configuration 4 52 Use the diamond key to move to REM_OUTS contact outputs see Fig 4 29 Use the knob to select the ConOutpt field Select the tag name of the contact out
258. owing eight character strings Opensens Open Sensor Hi Hi PV high high process variable alarm is active Lo Lo PV low low process variable alarm is active High PV high process variable alarm is active Low PV low process variable alarm is active HiHi Dev high high deviation alarm is active LoLo Dev low low deviation alarm is active High Dev high deviation alarm is active Low Dev low deviation alarm is active No Alarm no alarm is active PRINT request PR AS 1 PRINT response No Alarm TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ATD Activate Time of Day Start Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the enabled disabled status of clock driven programmer time of day start PRINT format PR ATD P where P is programmer number LET format LE ATD P X where X is Enable or Disable Field length 8 Value Enable Disable Activate time of day programmer start Enable Disable time of day programmer start Disable PRINT request PR ATD 1 PRINT response Disable LET request LE ATD 1 Enable LET response BC2 RS 232 Bits Character Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the number of bits per character used for RS 232 communications PRINT format PR BC2 LET format LE BC2 X where X is 7 or 8 Field length 1 Value 7 8 7 bits per character 7 8 bits per character 8 PRINT request PR BC
259. p of the Diamond Key to move up a row of screens The Icon changes to identify the row of screens you have selected Press the bottom of the Diamond Key to move down a row Of screens Inbt NMum DnlgIn i l b4 InbtTube Tubo J When you move up or down a row Of screens you always move to the first screen in the new row When you are at the bottom row and press the bottom of th diamond key you will move to the top r w 4 6 KA075771 001 DIMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 3 The Diamond Key Moving Left or Right Across a Row of Screens The Screen Title changes to identify what screen in the row you have selected Inrutolnn Looe Alm L Con Out __O Loy ic hari ote Abort Sro GuarSosk_D i The Icon identifies the row you are working on i D 1 Press the left side of the Press the right side of the Diamond Key to move E Key to move left one screen When you reach the last screen in the row moving left or right ou automatically wrap around to he first screen in the row 5112 4 7 KA075771 001 Unit CONFIGURATION 4 8 DiMENSION II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Glossary Configuration Screens Glossary Configuration screens are used to modify 8 character parameter tag names and screen titles Whenever a tag name or screen title is changed the change is reflected anywhere the tag name or title is used On Glossary
260. pass filter As the time constant increases the amount of filtering increases Typical settings range from 1 to 5 Filter range is from 0 to 100 seconds Default is zero KA075771 001 DimENSION l Series 8700 User s MaNuAL UNit CONFIGURATION Control_Act Selects the control action for the selected loop None This loop not used Reverse This loop is used for a reverse acting process In a re verse acting process the process variable input increases as the control loop output tends to decrease A heating loop is usually reverse acting Direct This loop is used for a direct acting process In a direct acting process the process variable input increases as the control loop out tends to increase A cooling loop is usually direct acting Bimodal This loop is used for both reverse and direct A process that has both heating and cooling capability would use bimodal con trol Two control outputs are used Limit Control action selections allow entering output limit values limit These values will limit the control output RvHiLmt1 Reverse output high limit RvLoLmt1 Reverse output low limit DrHiLmt1 Direct output high limit DrLoLmt1 Direct output low limit Deadband The amount of percent output before the process starts to respond to an applied output PID Type Selects the type of PID groups that will be used by the selected control loop See table 4 1 Singl
261. played in the OVERVIEW DISPLAYS selector box Pressing the knob performs the same OPERATION PROGRAM DISPLAYS function as a standard computer keyboard Enter or ICONS Return key LOOP DISPLAYS Quick Keys Press these two keys to perform the LOGIC MONITOR DISPLAYS functions labeled on the bottom row of the display screen Each of these keys can be user defined to execute a string of commands by pressing a single key For example each of these keys could be programmed ASH ALARM DISPLAYS to call up a specific display or to activate one or more UNIT CONFIGURATION control functions GLOSSARY CONFIGURATION Icons amp Screen Displays The first top icon in each CONFIGURATION PROCESS CONFIGURATION of the two major screen areas represents the Unit screen ICONS i DISPLAY CONFIGURATION area depicted as the RI logo Upon power up the first screen displayed is always the Unit Operation screen You may switch between and access screens in the two major areas Operation Configuration at the Unit icon RI logo by pressing the LEFT or RIGHT key HARDWARE CALIBRATION COMMUNICATIONS Copyright O 1990 Research Inc KA075727 001C ALARM CONFIGURATION This setup guide will describe the steps that should be followed to configure Analog Input Limits Loop Process Variable and Deviation limits and whether the alarms are latched or unlatched The alarms may also be configured to set a contact output or alter the mode of a con
262. points as the PV This can lead to strange things as noted above It is wise then to build the profile with the programmer that will drive the setpoint with the right number of decimal points i e use PROGRUNS screen and window to build segment data that will drive loop 3 Another point If the input range i e decimal position is changed the profile values will also change So if a setpoint program resides in memory with a profile value of 25 0 for PROGRUN1 screen and the input range is changed to a decimal position of 2 the new profile value will appear as 2 50 Examples using Lin Zero Lin Span Lin Decp InptLowLim and InptHiLim are on page 4 46 KAO075771 001 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION r q Example 1 0 to 10 volts input to represent 0 00 to 100 0096 Lin Zero 0 00 Lin Span 100 00 Lin DecP 2 InptLowLim 0 00 InptHiLim 100 00 Setpoint entries limited to 0 00 to 100 00 If the user wishes to limit his setpoints to 10 1 volt to 90 9 volts Lin_Zero 0 00 Lin_Span 100 00 Lin_DecP 2 InptLowLim 10 00 InptHiLim 90 00 Setpoint entries limited to 10 00 to 90 00 L l r 1 Example 2 0 to 10 volts to represent 100 0 to 900 00 C Lin Zero 100 0 Lin_Span 900 00 Lin_DecP 1 InptLowLim 100 0 will automatically default when Span Zero Dp are changed InptHiLim 900 00 Setpoint entries limited to 100 0 to 900 00 If the user wishes to limit his setpoints to O degrees
263. put you wish to configure Modify contact outputs as follows CyclTime Sets the cycle time in seconds If you wish to use a contact output as a time proportioned control output select a cycle time greater than 0 L RmC Outaai CuclTime Wu Condutet Emrputali CuclTime Example of Output Staging nalog outputs and TP outputs on the analog card can be used for output staging 0 to 25 control loop output corresponds to 0 to 5 volts on output 1 25 to 50 control loop to 0 to 5 volts on output 2 50 to 75 control loop to 0 to 5 volts on output 3 75 to 100 control loop to 0 to 5 volts on output 4 o configure Zero Span Output1 000 25 00 Output2 25 00 50 00 Output3 50 00 75 00 Output4 75 00 100 00 Span and Zero values can be negative also Zero 100 00 Span 100 00 For 0 5 volt output 0 00 2 5 volts 100 00 5 0 volts 100 00 0 0 volts Note In Dimension Il software the process box configuration does NOT ALLOW 100 00to 100 00 outputs i e both directand reverse outputs toonephysical analog output to be configured Therefore split range outputscan NOT be done 4 53 Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Saving Unit Configuration Data When you are finished configuring or modifying Dimension Il configuration parameters your new configuration data should be saved in a file on a memory card Important If the system is set up for a warm start all param
264. r Interface may be accessed See also FULL ACCESS Linearization The modification of a signal so that the signal level is directly proportional to the variable it represents Linearization is often applied to the signal from a thermocouple or RTD since these signals do not vary linearly with sensor temperature across the sensor s full operating range Linearization allows a process variable input signal to be directly compared to a linear setpoint when identifying deviation from setpoint See also I 0 BOARD THERMOCOUPLE RTD and LINEARIZATION TABLE Low Deviation Alarm LO DEV The Dimension II controller parameter sets the low deviation alarm trigger level The LO DEV value determines the negative deviation level deviation below setpoint at or below which a low deviation alarm is triggered See also ALARMS PROCESS MONITORING ALARMS HI DEV HI PV and LO PV E 9 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY E 10 Low Process Variable Alarm LO PV The Dimension II controller parameters sets the low process variable alarm trigger level The LO PV value determines the process variable level at or below which a low process variable alarm is triggered See also ALARMS PROCESS MONITORING ALARMS HI PV HI DEV and LO DEV Loop A process control signal path Dimension II controller channels are often referred to as loops e g Loop 1 instead of channel 1 See also CLOSED LOOP and OPEN LOOP Manua
265. r advise messages in table 5 1 If the problems still exist call Research Inc technical service Table 5 1 Dimension II Error Advise Messages REFERENCE ERROR ADVISE MESSAGE ACTION ADVO Only four x y graphs can be displayed on both Select a different type of display the Loop and Overview Screens for this loop or overview ADV1 Need to close a window before the Macro Key Close window before pressing can be executed Macro key ADV2 Fatal Error OI Fail to set CRC for the BBDir module Possible system failure Call Research Inc for technical support ADV3 ConCage Error Bad assignment parameter Possible communications error Error 401 Check Host or CLC software ADV4 ConCage Error Bad string variabie Check Host or CLC software Error 402 ADV5 ConCage Error Illegal system variable Check Host or CLC software Error 403 ADV6 Check Host or CLC software Also Error 404 possible Ol or CPU failure Call for technical support ADV7 ConCage Error Bad Path Name Check Host or CLC software Error 405 ADV8 ConCage Error Incomplete Path List Check Host or CLC software Error 406 ADV9 Host or CLC software is trying to Error 407 write to a read only parameter CLC software error or a system fault Error 408 ConCage Error Illegal tag name assignment Host or CLC software problem Error 409 Check the software code ConCage Error SPI Read timeout error Dimension li is not communicating Error 800 with t
266. r from Dimen sion II 9 Check that the host computer is powered up and electrically connected to Dimension II 10 Connect AC power to Dimension II No response is displayed in either the Dimension II or the host computer Dimension II simply performs its normal startup routines 11 To test whether the network mode is set up correctly start your software driver or run the DRIVER program found on the JumpStart II diskette A On your computer change to the JUMPII directory Type DRIVER CR Select the COM port you are connected to Select the station address Select 2 seconds for Character Timeout Set caps lock ON on your keyboard Ammons At the Comnd prompt enter PR TD and press return Response XX XX XX the Time of Day H Enter to end program or to start over Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS If an error number appears rather than a number as a response to the com mand refer to table B 5 in this appendix to identify the error that occurred Note If there is no response on your host computer following step 11 the settings given may not work with your application Try other baud rates and settings making sure that the settings on the Dimension II Communications Setup screen are also set to match your computer Remember the Dimension II AC power must be cycled off and on with the Dimension II in Warm Start for communications changes to take effect
267. r information on the Loop Setup window CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL Fig 3 16 Bar Graph Loop Display Screen PROGRAMMER OPERATION Bar Graph Loop Display Screen As shown in Fig 3 16 the horizontal bar graph loop display can display two user selectable variables and up to four user selectable lines of text The horizontal ranges are user selectable If the selector box can be moved into a text field the variable can be selected and manipulated The following field is also included LPMODE01 Loop setup window access to loop setup and auto turning functions User accessible See the Loop Control section following the Loop Display screen sections for information on the Loop Setup window Numeric Character Loop Display As shown in Fig 3 17 this display is similar to the bar graph but displays three parameters as large numeric characters This screen also displays four lines of user selected test as well as the follow ing field LPMODE01 Loop setup window access to loop setup and auto turning functions User accessible See the Loop Control section following the Loop Display screen sections for information on the Loop Setup window Fig 3 17 Numeric Character Loop Display Screen mre 22 3 C 20 9 C T SEGO1 00 00 20 OutPut_1 0 00 Dev_O1 3 6 C SptSrcO1 Programr LpModeO2 Manual 3 23 PROGRAMMER OPERATION CSZ DiMENSION II User s MANUAL Loop Control The Loop Setup W
268. r mode system variable has two different formats one for dis TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS playing PRINT commands and one for changing the status LET commands Status display PRINT commands Rum Run mode Hold Hold mode PG END Programmer in hold after completing a program run Programmer status change format LET command R PrgMode placed into run mode at current segment H PrgMode placed into hold mode S Starts a programmer run starting at segment in PS4 operator start segment Dimension II considers a start command from the network using PS as an Operator start In order to start a programmer using the PS variable the programmer must be configured for Operator start The CONF PRG screen for programmer X should have the OPStart field set to OPStrtOX Examples PRINT request PR PS 1 PRINT response Run LET request LE PS 1 S LET response PS1 Programmer Start Segment 1 Remote Start Purpose This parameter is the same as RSS See RSS PS2 Programmer Start Segment 2 Purpose Unused reserved for future use PS3 Programmer Start Segment 3 Time of Day Start Purpose To view or change the state of the Time of Day Start segment of the selected programmer Use PRINT format PR PSS P where P is programmer LET format LE PS3 P X where P is programmer number X a segment number Field length 8 Val
269. rameter Changes to any of these values can be made by turning the knob moving the cursor box to the appropriate term pressing the knob and entering the new Copyright O 1991 Research Inc Bimodal Control Setup Guide value Note Setting the dead band to a positive value creates a dead area no output while setting a negative value will create an overlap band where both outputs are on at the same time Tum the knob right and press to close window Step 5 Turn the knob moving the cursor box to PID type Typically this setting will be changed to dual For information on programmed or select adaptive PID consult other setup guides When dual is specified in loop configuration PID group one is dedicated to reverse heating output and PID group two is dedicated to direct cooling In addition to loop configuration output configuration will be required Before beginning this portion of the configu ration determine what type of outputs will be used in the bimodal process Once this has been determined press the diamond key right to move to the Output Configuration screen CONF OUT See Figure 2 Rotate the knob moving the cursor box to card select Card Sel press and rotateto viewthe output types The analog outputs are listed under the term AnlgCrd the time proportioned outputs are listed under the term TP Crd and the contact outputs are listed under Contact Also listed with each term is the card number Pre
270. rammer for display configuration Selections DCON PRG screen Progmr01 to Progmr08 Remarks The entries on the DCON PRG screen are used to configure the profile displays ofthe PROGRUN screens ProgName Program Name Use To select a program name to change Selection GLOS PRG screen Tagname Remarks The program names tagnames can be changed at this entry When this entry is selected a window opens to allow access to all 8 program names KA075771 001 A 25 DIMENSION l SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DisPLAY TERMINOLOGY PStatSrc Programmer Status Source Use Selections Remarks This field is to select how the programmer will be switched from run to hold CONF PRG screen OperRH_1 OperRH_4 RemCl 1 8 OR_set 14 NORset 1 4 ANDset 1 4 NANDset 1 4 The OperRH_1 OperRH_4 selections correspond with the switching from Auto to Manual or vise versa through the Operator Interface The selection of OperRH_1 would place the programmer in HOLD when PgMode01 was e lected to HOLD and the programmer would go into RUN when the LpMode01 was selected to RUN LpMode01 can be found under the PROGRUN screen OR NOR AND NAND selections correspond with the switching from RUN to HOLD or vise versa through a logic function Thus the programmer mode could be switched when an alarm condition occurred or an opensensor or a contact input or even all three A latched alarm would cause the loop to remain in HOLD
271. ration screen shown in Fig 4 21 Use the knob to select the PROGMRNM field Select the number of the display you wish to configure Use the knob to select the HI LIMIT field Select the desired upper limit for programmer profile displays Note On the vertical scale the limits selected are the real values ofthe setpoint 4 36 KA075771 001 DiMENSION I Series 8700 User s MANUAL UNIT CONFIGURATION Fig 4 21 Program Display Configuration Screen CSTARTI STOF 6 Using the same method select the LO_LIMIT lower limit and decimal position for programmer profile displays 7 Use the knob to select the ZOOM field 8 Select the desired horizontal time axis zoom factor Note Forthe zoom factor the information needed isthe amountoftime in seconds pixel thatthe horizontal axis represents range 1 3600 The length shouldbe chosen suchthatthe longest segmentcan be displayedin atleast 100 pixels The new configuration is now loaded in memory and can be saved onto a memory card 4 37 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MaNUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Loop Display Configuration The Loop Display Configuration screen and several support windows are used to assign display characteristics to Dimension II Loop displays As shown in Fig 4 22 there are three display formats available for control loop displays In any of the display formats shown in Fig 4 22 the parameters listed in
272. rature Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the actual cold junction temperature for a thermocouple input PRINT format PR CJ I where is the input number Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X temperature in degrees C Thermocouple cold junction temperature is always expressed in degrees C PRINT request PR CJ 1 PRINT response 25 0 CJE Cold Junction Error Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the cold junction error for a thermocouple input PRINT format PR CJE I where is input number LET format LE CJE X where is input number and X is amount of cold junction error compensation Field length 8 Cold junction error can be set from 10 0 to 10 0 C PRINT request PR CJE 1 PRINT response 2 2 LET request LE CJE 1 2 5 LET response CM Cascade Multiplier Purpose Use Remarks TA088002 001 To view or change the multiplier used for cascade control with a remote setpoint PRINT format PR CM L where L is loop number LET format LE CM L X where L is loop number X is the multiplier Field length 8 Value XXXXXXXX 32767 to 432767 A decimal point in the multiplier is not permitted B 35 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Examples CO Contact Out Purpose Use Remarks Examples CP Calculated Gain Purpose Use Remarks Examples PRINT request P
273. re is analog input number X is input high alarm limit value Field length 8 Remarks Range is dependent on input range Examples PRINT request PR IHC PRINT response 25 6 LET request LE IH 1 29 2 LET response IHL Input High Limit Purpose To view or change the input high limit for an analog input Use PRINT format PR HL I where is analog input number LET format LE IHL I X where is analog input number X is input high limit value Field length 8 Remarks The value range defaults to the range of the configured input type The setpoint and process variable will never exceed this limit PID calculations and other limits are affected when a change is made Examples PRINT request PR IHL I PRINT response 25 6 LET request LE IHL 1 29 2 LET response IHY Input Alarm Hysteresis Purpose To view or change the hysteresis value of an input alarm Use PRINT format PR IHY I where is input number LET format LE IHY I 2 XXXXXX X where is input number XXXXXX X is hysteresis value Field length 8 Value XXXXXX X 1392 8 to 1392 8 Remarks Range is same as input range e g IHL ILL Examples PRINT request PR IHY I PRINT response 11 0 LET request LE IHY 1 2 13 LET response IL Input Low Alarm Purpose To view or change the input low alarm limit for an analog input Use PRINT format PR 1L I where is analog input number LET format LE IL I 2 X
274. re C is CPU number B is Block number LET format LE CI C B Where the information inside the quotation marks depends on the block being changed Field length Block 0 3 all other blocks 128 All other blocks 128 CI is useful in network mode only when information is being uploaded or downloaded Block 0 contains the number of blocks for the complete configu ration image e g 64 The information in all other blocks depends on the block being viewed C is always 1 PRINT request PR CI 1 0 PRINT response 64 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL CIN Contact In Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS LET request LE CI 1 1 OOOAFC 76ED LET response 128 characters To view the state of a contact input PRINT format PR CIN C where C is the contact input number Field length 8 Value Tag name from one of the four possible sets of on off labels for contacts Each Dimension II controller has four pairs of on off labels Each contact input or output can be configured to use one of these four sets of labels So the four pairs might be On Off Open Closed True False and Run Stop and the user can assign contact input 4 to read Open or Closed The CIN parameter returns the state of the contact input using the labels chosen for the particular contact PRINT request PR CIN 3 PRINT response Off CJ Cold Junction Tempe
275. response 03 02 01 LET request LE LPC 05 05 01 LET response LS Loop Status Purpose To set a control loop s mode of operation auto or manual Use PRINT format PR LS L where L is loop LET format LE LS L M or A Field length 8 Value Manual or Auto Remarks In the LET message above A Control loop is in the automatic mode M Control loop is in the manual mode In the manual mode the operator may adjust the output No control action occurs in the manual mode In the auto mode the output is determined automatically by the PID feature Examples PRINT request PR LS 1 PRINT response Auto LET request LE LS 1 M LET response MCL Macro Name 1 Purpose To view or change the tag name for Macro Key 1 displayed on the Operator Interface display Use STAG format STAG MC 1 CTAG format CTAG MC 1 X where X is tag name Field length 8 Remarks Default tag name is START Examples STAG request STAG MC 1 STAG response START CTAG request CTAG MC1 ON CTAG response A AAA MC2 Macro Name 2 Purpose To view or change the tag name for Macro Key 2 displayed on the Operator Interface display B 46 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Use Remarks Examples MI Memory Image Purpose Use Remarks Examples MR Manual Reset Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS STAG format STAG MC2 CTAG
276. rofile scrolls horizontally When entries are made or edited successive recipe segments are displayed according to the new values a0 e SC 400 420 Sednent _ Aa 2 TETARTI CSTOP ed The vertical axis of tiie recipe profile displays five labeled tick marks The vertical axis labels are normalized such that if the variable range is 1000 to 1000 the tick marks will read 100 50 0 50 100 The horizontal and vertical axis displays tick marks The horizontal time scale is set on the Program Display Configuration screen DCON PRG At the bottom of the profile X Y graph is a line of text that scrolls through the selections on the Recipe Build Window Using the knob the items scroll as if the items were displayed on a full screen These values can be modified by using the multi function knob editing functions As values are entered for profile segments the profile is graphically displayed If for example the process setpoint is chosen for editing the text process variable displayed will change when the knob is turned On the X Y graph a line moves up and down on the display representing the relative value of the process variable When tne segment time is changed the X Y graph displays that segment expanding or contracting along the horizontal axis CSZ Dimension User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION When the recipe grows larger than the display screen the profile will scroll horizontally Also the Zoom factor can
277. rogram running from the start segment TOD Sseg at the time and day identified by TODStrt and DOWStrt TOD Sseg Time of Day Starting Segment Use To set the program starting segment when a time of day start occurs Selections PROG RUNG screen PgOption 1 255 option to 749 Remarks None TODStrt Time of Day Start Use To set the time of day at which a programmer will start Selections PROG_RUN screen PgOption HH MM SS Hours Minutes Seconds Remarks Tlme is set in standard 24 hour format TOD Strt must be set to Enable see TOD Strt TotalOvr Total Number of Overview Display Screens ei Use To select the total number of Overview screens Selections DCON OVR screen 1 to 9 Remarks This entry along with all display configuration information can be saved on a memory card in the file type DspConf Display configuration information is also saved when WarmStrt is selected as Sys Mode Tune PID Tune Weis Use This field is used to setup auto tuning parameters Selections CONF LOP screen Reverse Direct Sample rate Bump PID group Response speed Remarks Prior to starting auto tuning the following should be set up in the CONF LOP display Output Action Reverse or Direct This determines which direction to bump the output RESPTIME determines the time it takes the process to stabilize after a step change in the output This will determine the time auto tune will take to evaluate the process and calcul
278. rogrammer s currently active parameters Configure programmer parameters as follows OPStart Selects the Operator Start source When this point is ON the programmer will start running at the segment identified as starting segment Operator OpStrt Contact Inputs RemCl_ LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ optional RemStart Selects the Remote Start source When this point is ON the programmer will start running at the segment identified at RemSeg Selections include Operator RmStrt Contact Inputs RemCl_ LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ optional RemSeg The starting segment used when the Remote Start is ON FwdEnSrc Selects the Fast Forward Enable Source When this point is ON the programmer runs through the program at an accelerated rate The rate is adjusted by WarpF ctr Selections include Operator OperFF Contact Inputs RemCi_ LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ optional KA075771 001 DiMENSION II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL UNIT CONFIGURATION Fig 4 15 Programmer Configuration Parameter Selection Windows Keren leper ger Select Programmer pbortSre Oprabrt t to Configure arSoak__Dicab D Operator Cl Start Es CSTART CSTOP a Fast Forward Source R3C1 Programmer Configuration Fast Forward Acceleration Warp Factor D Programmer Sta
279. rt LE AB P Disable disables abort Field length 8 Programmer number is 1 through 8 If an abort signal is sent to programmer P when it is running it will immediately go to the abort segment segment 0 if AB P is Enable PRINT request PR AB 1 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL ACL Access Level Purpose Use Remarks Examples ACP Accept Input Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS PRINT response Disable LET request LE AB 1 Enable LET response To view controller security access passcode level PRINT format PR ACL Field length 8 Value FULL LIMITED NONE Full access to all Operation and Configuration functions FULL Access to all Operation functions LIMITED View only access to Operation screens NONE PRINT request PR ACL PRINT response FULL To view or change the status accept reject of calculated PID autotuning parameters PRINT format PR ACP L where L is loop number LET format LE ACP L x where L is loop number x is accept reject status Field length 8 Value Yes No Accept autotuning parameters Yes Reject autotuning parameters No PRINT request PR ACP 1 PRINT response Yes LET request LE ACP 1 No LET response ACY Analog Output Time Proportioning Cycle Time Purpose Use Remarks Examples TA088002 001 To view or change the cycle time of an a
280. ry card restores the input type to Current or Voltage ranges the EngUnits are set to Linear CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL Fig 2 30 X Y Graph Overview Display UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Overview Display Screens The CSZ Dimension can be configured to display up to eight ten if CLC option purchased user defined Overview displays These screens permit the operator to view and control your process in a variety of formats To access Overview displays press the diamond key until the Overview icon is displayed To call up specific Overview displays press the diamond key LEFT or RIGHT Overview displays can be configured in the form of X Y graphs horizontal or vertical bar graphs large character numeric displays or text displays The following are the typical default overview screens shipped from the factory and types of screens that can be configured They may have been changed for your application X Y Graph Overview Display As shown in Fig 2 30 the X Y graph Overview display option features an X Y graph combined with information in text format Up to four of these displays can be configured with each display trending and displaying two user selected variables The time base for sampling is seconds minutes or hours with a sampling rate from 1 to 100 The horizontal axis displays one sample per pixel with the cumulative time displayed every 20 pixels The vertical limits are user entered and the vertical axi
281. ry cartridge function Selections Mem Card Recipes SysConf Mem Img DspConf MacroKy Basic Remarks File names can be changed but the default file names determine what is stored for each file type The default file types are Recipes this file type stores all program segment information for all 256 segments SysConf this file stores communication parameters set on the COMM screen Mem Img this file stores all system configuration settings calibration settings and tagnames DspConf this file stores all changes to display configuration for the OVER VIEW LOOP and LOGIC screens MacroKy this file stores the Macro Keys programs KA075771 001 A 13 DiMENSION Il Series 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY FORMAT Memory Card Format Function Use To format a memory card Selection Mem Card FUNC Remarks See FUNC Format Display Format Ei Use To select a format for display configuration Selections DCON_OVR screen HOR_BAR XYCHART VER_BAR2 VER_BAR3 VER_BAR4 TEXT_3X TEXT_2X TEXT Remarks Display configuration changes can be stored on the memory cartridge in the DspConf file type HOR_BAR displays 2 horizontal bar graphs at the top of the screen with 5 lines of text below XYCHART displays 2 parameters in a strip chart like display at the top of the screen with 4 lines of text below Only 4 XYCHARTS are allowed Trending of data starts when the screen is dis played for the first
282. s PRINT request PR CAG 1 PRINT response 3 CC ReCycle Counter Purpose To monitor the number of recycles left for a programmer Use PRINT format PR CC P where P is programmer Value XXX Field length 8 Remarks Dimension II can recycle repeat a segment sequence up to 255 times i e the recycle value can be from 0 to 255 When the recycle value reaches zero the programmer ignores NEXT SEG and proceeds to SEG 1 Examples PRINT request PR CC 1 PRINT response 10 indicating that the programmer has 10 recycles left CCY Contact Output Time Proportioning Cycle Time Purpose To view or change the cycle time of a contact output being used as a time proportioned output Use PRINT format PR CCY C where C is contact output number LET format LE CCY C XXX where C is contact output number XXX is number of seconds Field length 3 Value 1 255 seconds Remarks Default dead start cycle time is O seconds output functions as non time proportioned contact output Range is 1 to 255 seconds Examples PRINT request PR CCY 1 TA088002 001 B 33 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS CD Calculated Rate CEV Current Events Purpose Use Remarks Examples Purpose Use Remarks Examples PRINT response 000 LET request LE CCY 1 10 LET response To view the rate calculated by the auto tuning function PRINT
283. s until the ColdJunc temperature reading is equal to the reading given by an external temperature measuring device that is attached to input connector P4 oO oO mm 4 44 KA075771 001 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MaNuAL Inet Num Dn 1 gInil Inbt Tube amp olcFune Calibr at InbtLouL im InbPtHiL im 766 3 En Unite Centiard T DecPo int__1 Mnemonic KA075771 001 UNiT CONFIGURATION CldJncEnbl is used to enable or disable the Cold Junction func tion This parameter is active only when a thermocouple is the selected input type When it is set to Enable the temperature reading from the thermocouple ProcVrOX is compensated by the cold junction temperature When it is set to Disable the ProcVr0X is not compensated by the cold junction temperature The Disable mode is used to check the accuracy of linearization tables PV Bias sets the process variable bias This value biases the entire input range If a bias value of 1 0 is entered the process variable is increased by 1 0 Save Aban allows saving or abandoning the calibration parameter values This allows a user to change the calibration and observe the result without permanently changing the parameters Newly entered values that are not saved will be lost when the unit is powered down Close WN Closes Calibrate screen and back to Input screen InptLowLim This parameter defaults to the lower limit of the input type selected
284. s 3 8 Setpoint Program Table sssssme 3 9 Blank ee EE 3 10 Enter Data From Table Into Dimension ll Program 3 11 14 Run a Recipe pter ni Dr socesdicue ede ped ENER 3 15 Stan a RecipBt Roe ara io ul o ned e d tbe teu 3 15 Operator Start ioi dun Data dte tado 3 15 Alternate Recipe Starts 00osnaiesoeniieessessererrrrrrrrrsns 3 15 SOD aA RECIPE T UH 3 16 Restart at Recipe End 9216 Stop Macro Key ed co reden ac ia Decal 3 16 Remote Switch uen ite tiic Dc oboe oce eed e owe e d ee 3 15 Hold FUNGON cse Catil eee e eto obstet 3 16 Advanced Features Ae 3 18 Ge EE 3 18 PIDSPOUDSaq dete todos dde eebe ee 3 18 PART SOUPS Scam cotton Duci ede 3 18 Guaranteed Goak 3 18 Editing a RECIDG s cii deer p er tod da 3 19 View Recipe oe eoi edet Dese qn Ho e EA 3 20 Display GE 3 21 22 Loop Display Screens cesses nennen nnne 3 22 X Y Graph Loop Display Screen ssenneesoeeeeeeereinen 3 22 Bar Graph Loop Display Screen ieseieeeseerrerereerrrreeenn 3 23 Numeric Character Loop Display 3 23 Loop COMO os ees tue odeur p te ottenuta Pieds 3 24 LOOP AUTO TURING on eH ees dat iem aeo cusa 3 25 26 Logic Display Screens annnnnnnoonenneeennonerrsrrrsrrrirnnrrrene 3 26 27 CSZ Dimension ll User s MaNuAL Section 4 Unit Configuration What is Configuration oe eeccccccesecsceseceseseseeessesssereeees 4 2 How is Configuration Accomplished
285. s accomplished by entering information with the knob on the Operator nterface The specific techniques for using the knob to enter or change configuration parameters are similar to the techniques used on the operation screens Some selections are made directly on the primary configuration screens Other selections are made in windows that open in response to your specific param eter selections The configuration process is dynamic As you enter selections the Dimension ll keeps track of your choices and prompts you for additional selections where needed The Dimension II will also delete choices that are no longer necessary as you proceed You may see the parameter list in the windows change as you enter selections as the Dimension Il prompts you for the necessary information Before you begin configuration review the parameter entry techniques in Figs 4 4 4 5 and 4 6 on the following pages to familiarize yourself with Selecting a parameter by scrolling through a list on the primary con figuration screen Fig 4 4 Selecting parameters in configuration windows Fig 4 5 Selecting multiple parameters in configuration windows that change prompt you for more selections as you enter or change parameters Fig 4 6 4 9 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Fig 4 4 Using the Knob to Scroll Through List of Parameters OutSro One AlarmAct De f Retrnemt_ _ AnlatIngi v
286. s is 50 pixels high The value of the reference mark and the units of the X and Y axes are displayed at the top of the graph For example the units are displayed in Fig 2 30 as F and seconds DU IEN 12 22 22 Long REF n n OOF YS SEC CeiPni8i 1 146 DutPut 1 2z4 LeMadeait _ Duto CSTARTI CSTOP 2 35 CSZ Dimension ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 31 Horizontal Bar Graph Overview Display 2 36 By moving the selector box to the rer numeric field at the top of the graphic display and pressing ENTER a horizontal reference mark on the right margin of the screen can be displayed and moved along the Y axis by turning the multi function knob As the reference mark moves up CW or down CCW on the graph the precise value in the rer field changes accordingly The graph itself can consist of the selected process variable and if selected the associated setpoint versus time This screen also displays up to four lines of user selectable information below the graph If the selector box can be moved into a field the variable can be selected and manipulated Horizontal Bar Graph Overview Display As shown in Fig 2 31 the horizontal bar graph Overview displays two user selectable variables in bar graph format and up to five lines of text The horizon tal ranges are user selectable If the selector box can be moved into a text field the variable can be selected and manipulated PROCVRO
287. s parameter determines whether a control loop receives its setpoint from the operator a programmer or a remote source A calculated setpoint is consid ered remote To configure a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer the Setpoint Source SPS must be set to Programr and the loop s Remote Setpoint Source must be set to ProgramX where X is the programmer you would like to control the loop On the Dimension II operator interface the Setpoint Source appears as SptSrcOX in the window accessed by clicking on the LpModeOX field of the main screen for loop X The Remote Setpoint Source appears as RemSPsrc on the CONF LOP screen There is no network parameter available to set the Remote Setpoint Source PRINT request PR SPS 1 PRINT response Operator LET request LE SPS 1 P LET response To view or change the sample rate of a loop input for tuning PRINT format PR SR L where L is loop number LET format LE SR L x where L is loop number x is sampling rate Field length 8 Value Range is 0 to 1000 The number of input samples taken should be at least 200 The sampling rate is in multiples of 200 milliseconds PRINT request PR SR 1 PRINT response 202 LET request LE SR 1 220 LET response B 65 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS SS System Status Purpose Use Remarks Examples To indicate whether control functions are running A
288. s the knob to close Step 2 Rotatethe knobtothe rightandselectthe LoopAlm entry pressthe knob andturnthe knob right or leftto select the desired loop to configure Press the knob to enter selection The window shown in Figure 3 will appear This display allows the entry of the Hysteresis values and the Latch Unlatch status for the HIHI HI process variable alarm and th HIHI HI deviation alarm Note that the HIHI and HI values are also used for the LOLO and LO values Select the desired values for these parameters by press ing the knob moving the cursor box to a selection pressing the knob rotating right to scroll though options and press ing the knob againto enter selection Rotate the knob right to close the window highlight Close Wn and press knob Step 3 Press the diamond key up twice to highlight the RI icon and then right once to access the operation side Alarm Configuration Setup Guide CSTART CSTOP CSTART CSTOP Figure 2 Analog Output Source Configuration Window of the Dimension Press down to highlight the Alarm icon at the bottom of the display Press the key right once to access the ALM_SET set display as shown in Figure 4 This display allows entry of the alarm limits for each alarm type for input and loop alarming Rotate the knob and move the selector box to the InputAlm field and press the knob and rotate to select the desired analog input Press the knob again to make entry The window shown
289. sccisssessactateecesianvessaievessentynednasivvcens B 11 End of Text Control Character B 15 RFCS UIA EE B 15 Error egene B 17 Test DIOE wsss cssssieaasisniadssvbsnesenidesleriavvinvuncensanenntsssiiebty B 17 System Variable Data Access B 18 System Variable Centaure bag B 18 PRINT Commands cives ris eter ee Eye vates B 18 LET Commands reisen rigen Up SER ERI CHS prin B 20 LIST Commands srt as tt Ir e EHE e avetee B 20 STAG Commands eere B 20 UE Ke E TEE B 23 System Variable Descriptions ssssissscainscnsaiihsneositences B 24 Example of System Variable Use B 70 Error Messages B 71 RS 422 RS 423 Communications Watchdog B 72 B 1 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Serial Communica tions This appendix explains how to communicate with Dimension II Series 8705 8725 controllers via an RS 232 or RS 422 serial link from a terminal or host computer All parameters needed for terminal or network mode communica tions are described Communications Overview Serial communications capability is available to link Dimension II units with a terminal or a host computer The following topics are discussed in this appendix Communication types Data access methods Communication types refer to handshaking techniques that permit communica tion to occur Data access refers to the methods by which Dimension II data can be viewed or changed The two communication types availabl
290. sensing devices thermocouples RTD s etc For example a range of 100 to 900 degrees has a span of 1000 degrees Split Range Control A type of bi modal control except there is one analog output for both reverse and direct acting control outputs This analog output is split where 0 50 of the analog output corresponds to the direct acting control output and 50 100 of the analog output corresponds to the reverse acting control output KA075771 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL KA075771 001 GLOSSARY Steady State A condition in which values remain essentially constant occurring after all initial transients or fluctuating conditions have settled down Synchronous Communications A method of transmitting data in which communications timing is synchro nized for an entire message by the transmission of initial synch characters No character stop or start bits are used in SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS See also ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS and COMMUNICATIONS Thermocouple A temperature sensor that produces a millivoltage output signal The thermo couple consists of two dissimilar metals joined at one end The voltage across the thermocouple junction also known as the heated junction is proportional to the junction temperature See also COLD JUNCTION COLD JUNCTION COMPENSATION Time Proportioned Output An output that provides periodic on off pulses with the relative proportion of on time and off tim
291. sing to make selection Note The zero span setting should match the process variable input InptLowLim and InptHiLim set tings when setting up a retransmit Tum the knob to close the window The ANA OUTS screen will appear again Configuration is complete l CSTART Figure 5 Analog Output Configuration Window CSTOP Page 2 Retransmitting a Loop Deviation Setting of Staged Outputs An extension of a single control output is used to accom plish output staging For example if we choose to use normal and boost heating on loop 1 of our process we will select the normal heating output to be assigned from 0 to X percent of control loop Output X would be the transfer point from normal stage to stage two boost stage The boost heating from X to 100 percent of the output level Step 1 Step one will access the appropriate screen Push the diamond key up until the RI icon is highlighted Press the diamond key right or left to move from the operation side of the Dimension Controller to the con figuration side Now press the down key twice until the Process Configuration icon is highlighted Press the key right three times until Configure Outputs screen ap pears See Figure 1 LSTHRTJ CSTOP Figure 1 Configure Outputs Screen Step 2 Step two will select the UO card to which outputs will be assigned Assign analog outputs on the analog card Tum the multi purpose knob right moving the cursor box to Card Sel and press t
292. sion II Operation screens The four letters e g R3C1 above each screen in Fig 2 26 indicate the relative position of each screen in the operation screen map For example the Programmer Run screen titled procrun1 is labeled R3C1 to indicate its position as Row 3 Column 1 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 26 CSZ Dimension Il Map of Operation Screens Paset i ProcUr Gi c GetPntal ve 41 0 ESTART STOP Run L oModo i Manual R5C2 LOGIC lal RmCOut G1 __ RmCOut i___ RmCOutBs_ E 3 88883883583 Hi IEEE 8 EE ICH p reer ree 7333553555 233339333 2 27 CSZ Dimension l User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Selecting Icons and Screens S Al OI JS Universal operator interface screen displays are organized in a horizontal vertical software hierarchy A set of six graphic icons displayed on the right side of the screen shows where you are located vertically in the hierarchy The currently active icon is always displayed in inverse video The diamond keypad located directly below the help key is used to perform one function to exit from the currently displayed screen and to call up another screen The keypad consists of four physically integrated but separate keys The UP and DOWN diamond keys are used to moved vertically through the screen display hierarchy from icon to ico
293. sion ll User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Listed below are brief descriptions for each parameter on the Alarm Acknowledge Screen ALARM01 ALARMO2 PRODUCT CHAMBER PRESS Si DISCH Si BACKUP 1 PRESS_ 2 DISCH_ 2 BACKUP 2 Indicates that an alarm has occurred for control loop 1 temperature loop Indicates that an alarm has occurred for control loop 2 humidity loop Indicates that either a Prod Lo or Prod Hi condition has occurred in the chamber The limits for this alarm are adjustable by the operator on the Prod_limit screen Indicates that a high temperature condition has occurred in the chamber This limit is set by the factory and cannot be changed by the operator It is solely to protect the chamber from a run away condition Not Active Not Active Indicates that the system 1 HFC 404A compressor has exceeded its high pressure limit This limit is set by the factory and cannot be changed by the operator Not Active Not Active Same as BACKUP 1 except for system 2 HFC 23 2 19 CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 17 Alarm Setup Screen Alarm Setup Screen As shown in Fig 2 17 the Dimension I alarm types are listed on the alarm Setup screen To check or modify specific alarm limits the operator first moves the selector box to an alarm type in the list scrolls through a list of input or loop numbers and then presses ENTER to
294. splay configuration Quikeys Quick key configuration storage REDUNDANT INPUTS In the middle of a process a temperature or other sensor could fail Production time is lost the cost of the material can be expensive and in the worst case an oven or autoclave may be destroyed Alarms on the process solve part of the problem However an operator must be avail able to respond to critical conditions that develop The real need lies in a backup system that is low cost The Dimension Controller offers a low cost alternative to a redundant controller The Dimension Controller can be configured to switch the input from an original sensor to a back up sensor in the event of a burn out or open condition Step 1 Access the configuration side of the unit by pressing the diamond key up to highlight the RI icon Press right until the ABC icon is directly below the RI icon Now press down until the Configuration DE icon is highlighted Press right until the CONF LOP screen appears See Figure 1 Step 2 Select loop number one Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to Loop Nm Press the knob and rotate until the proper loop is displayed Press the knob to make selection Rotate the knob again moving the cursor box to the second selection PVsource Press the knob An embedded window will appear showing a configuration tree Press the knob and rotate until Analn1_2 appears Press the knob to select Rotate the knob moving the cursor box to End
295. sponse To monitor or change the rate derivative value for a control loop PRINT format PR RT L where L is loop LET format LE RT L X where L is loop number X is the new rate value Value XX XX This system variable prints or changes the actual rate value currently in use for a control loop PRINT request PR RT 1 PRINT response 1 50 LET request LE RT 4 1 1 LET response Displays or changes the biasing of a profile setpoint PRINT format PR SA L where L is loop number LET format LE SA L X where L is loop number X is bias value Field length 8 This number is added to the profile setpoint of a loop when its setpoint source is Programr The setpoint of the loop will be equal to its profile value in the current segment plus the setpoint adjust This allows a whole setpoint program to be shifted up or down by a fixed constant amount PRINT request PR SA 1 PRINT response 10 0 LET request LE SA 1 1 5 LET response To view or change the number of stop bits used during RS 232 communications PRINT format PR SB2 LET format LE SB2 X where X is the number of stop bits Field length 1 Value 1 or 2 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Set number of stop bits to 1 or 2 This must match your host computer s setting PRINT request PR SB2 PRINT response 2 LET request LE SB2 1
296. ss the knob to select the card choice and openthe configuration window To change the source of any type of output rotate the knob moving the cursor box to the appropriate line and press A list of available sources will appear For this set up only the reverse RevOut and direct DirOut will be used Also note the L1 L4 which signifies which loop output will be used Repeat this function for each loop and for each output type Rotate the knob right moving cursor to Close Wn and press knob CSTART CSTOP Figure 2 Output Configuration Screen USING CASCADE CONTROL The control provided by using a single PID controller is often times inadequate for the exact part temperature control needed in many autoclaves presses extruders and furnaces Other processes that may have a very slow response rate may be unstable when only one PID controller is used For these reasons a multi loop or cascade control scheme is utilized In this scheme the primary loop output sets the setpoint of the secondary loop output The following steps will show how the Dimension Controller may be used in a cascade format In this example loop 1 will be the primary or part temperature loop slow responding and loop 2 will bethe secondary or air temperature loop fast responding For applications involving other Dimension Controller loops substitute the appropriate loop number Step 1 Access the unit Configuration side of the Dimen sion Controller by pressi
297. t PR CRS L where L is loop number Field length 8 Displays the reset that will be used if auto tuning values are accepted PRINT request PR CRS 1 PRINT response 1 00 CS Current Segment Number TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL Purpose Use Remarks Examples SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS To monitor the current segment number for a given programmer PRINT format PR CS P where P is programmer Field length 8 Dimension II units have segments 0 to 255 0 to 749 with Extended Segments Option PRINT request PR CS 1 PRINT response The response indicates that the current segment for programmer 1 is segment 3 CSP Current Span Reference Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the span reference determined during calibration PRINT format PR CSP I where is analog input number LET format LE CSP 1 X where is analog input number X is span reference value Field length 8 Value XXXX XXX This reference number should not be changed unless an input channel is being recalibrated PRINT request PR CSP 1 PRINT response 100 323 LET request LE CSP 1 100 356 LET response CZE Current Input Zero Purpose Use Remarks Examples DF Digital Filter Purpose Use Remarks TA088002 001 To view or change the current input zero value determined during calibration PRINT format PR CZE I wher
298. t requires a space between the command characters and the data message e g between PRINT and SP 1 in Fig B 8 Commands The command is one of the two elements in the request message data field Fig B 8 There are five valid commands PRINT LET LI LIST STAG and CTAG The command determines whether the data message will monitor PRINT a system variable change LET a system variable display LIST all permissible parameters show a display tagname STAG for a system variable or change a display tagname CTAG for a system variable Ifa command is not specified LET is assumed The Dimension II will recognize the first two letters of PRINT LET and LIST you can transmit LE for LET PR for PRINT or LI for LIST However STAG and CTAG cannot be abbreviated and LIST must be abbreviated Also a PRINT command may include comment text enclosed in quotes Comment text will be returned in the response mes sage For example Request message PR The Dimension ll setpoint is SP 1 Response message The Dimension ll setpoint is 10 0 TA088002 001 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Data Message The data message is one of the two elements in the data field and can be up to 120 characters long The data message always begins with a system variable that identifies the type of information setpoint deviation process variable etc to be changed or monitored Also several system vari ables may be
299. tart from a remote location If all four programmers abort sources were selected to be the same then all four programmers would go into the abort mode when the appropriate Abort source became true i AbrtSrc Operator Abort Source Selection Ha gt Use Operator abort source for setpoint programmer Remarks SeeAbortScr ACC Security Access Level Use To display current access level Selection None Remarks This entry will display the current access level If the correct access code is entered for FULL or LIMITED access the status message Access Granted wil Ibe displayed at the bottom of the window with this entry being updated to reflect the new level see Access Accept Accept Auto tuning PID Parameters Use To accept the calculated PID parameters and transfer them into use for the control loop Selections Yes or No Remarks True will transfer the caiculated PID parameters The appropriate PID Group needs to be selected Access Security Access Level Use To display the current access level and to enter a passcode to change the cur rent access level Selection UNIT screen opens a window Remarks FULL allows complete access to all parameters LIMITED allows access to all operating parameters and does not allow access to configuration parameters NONE allows access to view all operating parameters but does allow access to change them l KA075771 001 A 3 DIMENSION I SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR
300. th configuration and operation A set of highly readable backlit screen displays using both text and process graphics Dedicated help key Multi function knob for data entry and parameter selection Two user programmable macro keys for combining often used multiple steps into one function User definable displays Screens in text numeric X Y charts bar charts User definable screens and process terminology An integrated memory card slot that can read from and write to remov able data storage memory cards Front Panel Controls The following paragraphs identify and describe the CSZ Dimension II universal operator interface front panel controls shown in Fig 2 1 Help Key Located in the upper right hand corner of the front panel the help key is designed to perform two functions Cancel an entry Pressing the help key when entering a value will cancel the entry Provide on screen help Pressing the help key opens a help window containing instructions for the currently accessed field Pressing the help key a second time or the knob closes the window CSZ Dimension ll User s Manual UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE Fig 2 1 CSZ Dimension Il Universal Operator HELP KEY Interface Front Panel DIMENSION II N DIAMOND KEY 1 Cee Hy Ml g BACKLIT DISPLAY SCREEN Ee 9 Q Iii D D MULTI FUNCTION KNOB K102 MEMORY CARD PORT Note During some operations help messages ar
301. the five alarm settings groups is active at all times The setpoint pro grammer selects which group is active Aim Mess Alarm Message Use Toselect a user entered alarm help message Selections DCON ALM screen LOOP__1 to LOOP__8 opens a window A 4 KA075771 001 Dimension Il SERIEs 8700 User s MaNuAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY Remarks Enter an alarm help message using the knob Default message is Arr_Temp Press the knob and move the cursor block to the large C to close this window The help message can be displayed on the ALARM__1 status screen when the given alarm is selected and the help key is pressed Anal Ins Analog Input Tagnames Use Opens a window to allow changing the tagnames used for analog inputs Selection GLOS IO screen 8 characters Remarks Select up to eight characters to form a new name AnalOuts Analog Output Tagnames Use Opens a window to allow changing the tagnames used for analog outputs Selection GLOS IO screen 8 characters Remarks Select up to eight characters to form a new name AnaOutpt Analog Output Use Selects an analog output for configuration or calibration Selections ANA OUTS screen AN OUT 1 to AN OUT 8 Remarks Analog outputs one through four are found on the first analog I O module Analog outputs five through eight are found on the second analog I O module See calibration instructions for more information AT ErrNo Auto Tune Error
302. tion is required a window will open with prompts for more information Enter the additional information as required At this point your configuration data will be written to the memory card under the file name you specified To read a memory card file into system memory follow the above procedure but specify READ rather than WRITE function as required Memory Card Information The memory card files contain the following Dimension Il information 1 Mem Img Memory Image Unit configuration Full and limited access passwords system mode Macro Key tag names Glossary configuration System glossary GLOS_SYS programmer glossary GLOS PRO excluding Recipe Tag Names ProgName Loop glossary GLOS_LOP UO glossary GLOS IO Process configuration Programmer configuration CONF PRG Loop configura tion CONF LOP including Auto Tune parameters Alarm configuration CONF ALM Output configuration CONF OUT Analog Input configuration not calibration Analog Output configuration not calibration Remote Output configuration Time Proportioning Output configuration Contact Output configuration Communication configuration The following Process Settings Programmer Option settings PgOption Analog Input Alarm settings InputAlm Manual Reset ManRst Setpoint Source SptSrc Loop Mode LpMode 2 33 UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE 2 34 e e e CSZ Dimension II User s MANuAL
303. tions available for the corresponding BSV variable PRINT format DR BLV V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BLV V AAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB CCCCCCCC DDDDDDDD where AAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB CCCCCCCC DDDDDDDD are 8 character strings Field length 35 BLV V is the set of four string values which B SV V may take The meaning and use of these strings is determined by the user via CLC programming When changing BLV the full 35 characters MUST be entered with a comma as the 9th 18th and 27th characters V can be any number from 1 to 32 PR BLV V is equivalent to LI BSV V PRINT request PR BLV 2 PRINT response Run Hold Abo C uq CETT LET request LE BLV 14 2 Up Down Left Right LET response BND CLC Basic Number of Decimals Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the number of decimal places used for the corresponding BNV BHL and BLL PRINT format PR BND V where V is variable number 1 32 LET format LE BND V X where V is variable number and X is a number Field length 1 B ND V is the number of decimal places which are shown when displaying BNV V BHL V and BLL V V can be any number from 1 to 32 PRINT request PR BND 1 PRINT response 2 LET request LE BND 4 2 1 LET response BNV CIC Basic Numeric Variable Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change a CLC numeric variable PRINT format PR BNV V w
304. tpoint ramping Auto Man Selects how the control loop is switched between automatic closed loop and manual open loop Selections include Operator OperAM_ Contact Inputs RemCl_ LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ 4 28 KA075771 001 Dimension I Series 8700 User s Manual Unit CONFIGURATION M_OutSrc Selects the source for the control loop manual output adjust ment Operator The control loop manual output is adjusted from the operator interface panel Remote The control loop manual output is adjusted from one of two sources an analog input Anligin or a control loop output OutputL AlarmAct Selects the open sensor alarm action DefltVal Sets the control loop output default value that will be used when an open sensor thermocouple break is detected A setting of 0 00 is most common Retrnsmt Selects a process variable setpoint or profile to be retrans mitted by an analog output Refer to Analog Output Setup in this sec tion for additional configuration information Alarm and Logic Configuration Refer to Fig 4 17 The Alarm Configuration screen is used to enter or modify alarm parameters and alarm management strategies Some of the selections made on this screen open windows for parameter configuration selections Configure Dimension Il alarms as follows 1 Use the diamond key to move to the Alarm Configuration screen shown in Fig 4
305. tput 4 to 0 5V DC configuration See Getting Started Guide for instruction Your Dimension Controller will arrive with a factory set 4 20 mA configuration Power up your con troller Step 2 Using the diamond key press up to highlight RI KI icon and press right to access the configuration side of the Dimension Press down until the Program Configu ration screen CONF_PROG appears and press right to the Output Configuration screen CONF_OUT See Fig CSTART CSTOP Figure 1 Output Configuration Screen Retransmit Setup Guide ure 1 Turn knob right moving the cursor to Card_Sel and press the knob Change the selection to AnlgCrd1 by turning the knob and pressing An embedded window will open to allow configuration of the analog output source See Figure 2 The cursor box will be around the first selection RevOutL1 Press the knob and change the selection to DevOutL1 AnaOut04 Turn the knob and press to close window CSTART JI CSTOP Figure 2 Analog Output Source Configuration Window Step 3 The next step is to calibrate analog output 4 to 0 5V DC with a multimeter Press the diamond key down to highlight the Hardware Calibration icon amp The Input screen will appear Press the diamond key right until the Analog Outputs screen ANA_OUTS appears See Figure 3 CuclT ime 0B CSTARTI CSTOP Figure 3 Analog Output Screen Step 4 Tum the knob right moving the cursor box to AnaOutpt press the kn
306. tputs PRINT format PR EV E where E is event 1 12 Field length 8 Value ON or OFF This reports the on off state of the Dimension II events Each programmer may set them but each event has only one state at a time PRINT request PR EV 1 PRINT response To view or change the passcode required to change the security access level to FULL status PRINT format PR FPC LET format LE FPC X where X is passcode Field length 8 Value XX XX XX The FULL passcode permits access to all system Operation and Configuration functions PRINT request PR FPC PRINT response 01 02 03 LET request LE FPC 01 03 05 LET response GAS Global Alarm Status Purpose Use Remarks Examples GN Gain Purpose Use Remarks TA088002 001 To view global alarm status PRINT format PR GAS Field length 8 Value No Alarm Alarm No active global alarm No Alarm Active global alarm Alarm PRINT request PR GAS PRINT response No_Alarm To view or change the actual gain proportional value PRINT format PR GN L where L is loop LET format LE GN L X where L is loop and X is the new gain value Field length 8 Value XX XX This system variable prints the actual gain value for a control loop LET sets gain for the current PID group B 41 Dimension Il SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Examples PRINT request PR GN 1 PRINT response 3 50
307. trol loop when the alarm condition is set This configuration is not covered in this setup guide Step 1 Enter the configuration mode of the controller by pushing the diamond key up to highlight the RI icon and pressing the key right until the Unit Configuration screen UNIT_CONF display is shown Press the dia mond key down twice to the Process Configuration icon gt then right twice to select the Alarm Configuration screen CONF ALM shown in Figure 1 This display allows entry of the analog input loop process variable limits hysteresis values and the alarm action Rotate the knob moving the cursor box to InputAlm Press the knob and turn the knob right to scroll through selections Press the knob to select the entry The window shown in Figure 2 will be displayed This window allows the entry of the Hysteresis value and the Latched or Unlatched alarm actionforthe selected Analog Input Turnthe knob moving the cursor box to InpHys 1 press to select turn knob to change hysteresis value and press the knob again to select Hysteresis is the value that is entered for the window around the alarm limit in which the alarm will not turn on or off Inthe same manner move cursorto InLtch1 and select latched or unlatched alarms A latched alarm will requirethatthe operator acknowledge the alarm before turning off An unlatched alarm will turn off after system correction of the alarm Rotate the knob moving the cursor box to Close Wn and pres
308. ts logic points and other variables CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL PROGRAMMER OPERATION Fig 3 20 LOoP___i 23 02 34 Logic_1 Display Screen ei 3 _ 4 5 _ 6 7 8 9 O e Fig 3 21 Logic 2 Display Screen Use the diamond key to select he Logic icon To call up specific Logic dis plays press the diamond key LEFT or RIGHT As shown variable tag names are displayed on the left side of the screen and current status is displayed to the right 3 27 Dimension II Series 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Section 4 Unit Configuration Whatis Configuration eueueueseueeeessese 4 2 Howis Configuration Accomplished 4 2 Before You Configure ueessses 4 3 Moving Around the Configuration Screens 4 3 Moving Up or Down a How 4 5 Moving From Screen to Screen Across a Row 4 5 Configuration Screens Overview 4 5 Unit Configuration Screen seee 4 5 Glossary Configuration Screens 000naanaa0eaeeaaa 4 8 Process Configuration Screens iiaeiiiiineeeee 4 8 Display Configuration Screens 4 8 UO Setup and Calibration Screens 4 8 Communication Setup Screens 000oa1aaa00eeneeeaa 4 8 Making Configuration Selections 4 9 UnitConfigurationScreens
309. tus gt Run Hold Source Abort Jump to Segment 0 ource Guaranteed Soak Enable Disable 5118 KA075771 001 4 23 Unit CONFIGURATION 4 24 Note Analarm condition occurs ifalarm limits are exceeded during guaranteed soak Dimension ll Series 8700 User s MANUAL Warp Fctr Selects the Fast Forward Warp Factor The warp factor is a multiplier applied to the normal programmer time base A warp factor of 10 will cause the programmer to run ten times normal speed PStatSrc Selects the Status Source to switch the programmer between Run and Hold Selections include Operator OperRH Contact Inputs RemIin_ LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ optional AbortSre Selects the Abort program source When ON the pro grammer goes into an abort routine starting at segment 0 When OFF the programmer resumes recipe from the point at which program was aborted Selections include Operator OprAbrt Contact Inputs Remin LocCl _ Logic OR_Set NORSet ANDSet NANDSet CLC_IN_ optional GuarSoak Selects guaranteed soak When guaranteed soak is enabled the programmer will Hold when ever deviation limits are exceeded The limits are entered on the ALM_SET display at Loop_Alm The HiDev and LoDev alarm settings are used by guaranteed soak KA075771 001 Dimension ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL Unit CONFIGURATION Control Loop Configuration Refer to Fi
310. types OVERVIEW DISPLAYS PROGRAMMER DISPLAYS LOOP DISPLAYS LOGIC DISPLAYS ALARM STATUS DISPLAYS Overview Display Configuration The Overview Display Configuration screen and several support windows are used to select display formats and configure display characteristics to Dimen sion Il Overview displays Up to eight Overview displays and optionally two additional CLC displays may be selected and configured The display formats available are shown in Fig 4 19 KA075771 001 4 33 Dimension II SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL UNir CONFIGURATION Fig 4 19 Display Formats for Overview Display Configuration Screens XY CHART Two parameters VER BARA Four parameters may be charted versus time and may be displayed in bar graph four parameters may be dis format played as text VER BAR2 Two parameters may be displayed as vertical bar graphs gdeetler c engt L m9eti mgg nicmcncoxm 1 ma mg VER_BAR3 Three parameters may be displayed in bar graph format One parameter may be displayed as text TEXT 2X Eight parameters may be displayed in 2X text format TEXT 3X Three parameters may be displayed in 3X text format and four parameters may be displayed as text HP cXDncox 144 L t SetPntal KEE UB TEXT 12 parameters may be HOR BAR Two parameters are displayed displayed in text format in a horizontal bar format and five parameters may be
311. ue 0 255 0 749 with Extended Segments Option Remarks This is the segment where the indicated programmer will start if started by the Time of Day Start feature Examples PRINT request PR PS3 1 PRINT response 2 LET request LE PS3 4 20 LET response PS4 Programmer Start Segment 4 Operator Start Purpose To view or change the Operator Start segment for a particular programmer Use PRINT format PR PS4 P where P is programmer LET format LE PS4 P X where P is programmer number X is a segment number Field length 8 Value 0 255 0 749 with Extended Segments Option Remarks This is the segment where the indicated programmer will start if started by the TA088002 001 B 57 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Examples PT PID Type Purpose Use Remarks Examples PUD Power Up Date Purpose Use Remarks Examples PUT Power Up Time Purpose Use Remarks Examples B 58 operator from the Dimension II operator interface or by use of the command LE PS P S PRINT request PR PS4 2 PRINT response 1 LET request LE PS4 3 5 LET response To view or change the PID type for a control loop PRINT format PR PT L where L is loop LET format LE PT L X where X is S D P or A Field length 1 PID type determines whether a control loop uses single PID S dual PID D programmed PID P or Select Adaptive A
312. ult PID group to which the tuning param eters will be transferred Fast Medium Slow Selects the default response speed desired Fast will calculate PID parameters that cause the control loop to be highly responsive Overshooting will occur when reaching setpoint RemSPsrc Selects the remote setpoint source for the selected control loop The remote setpoint is used when Remote is selected for the setpoint source on the loop operation display e Programs Selects one of the programmed profiles to be the remote setpoint e Anlgin Selects one of the analog inputs to the remote setpoint OutputL Selects one of the control loop outputs to be the remote setpoint This selection is most commonly made to implement cascade control When this selection is made additional parameters are pre sented for blending and scaling SetPntL Selects one of the control loop setpoints to be the remote setpoint This selection would be used to have one loop track another loop CCLInptit Selects one of two calculated inputs from the optional CLC program Note Parttemperature orcascade control usestwo controlloops one to control the parttemperature primary loop andone tocontrolthe process temperature secondary loop Blendedparttemperature control on the otherhand blends a portion ofthe parttemperature setpoint with the process temperature setpoint Blended control is typically used to maintain precise control with se
313. unications Baud Rate Use Selections Remarks To select the communications baud rate for this unit 232_PORT and422 PORT screens 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 Select the communications baud rate to match your computer The two most common selections are 9600 or 19200 KA075771 001 DiMENSION ll SERIEs 8700 User s MANUAL OPERATOR INTERFACE DISPLAY TERMINOLOGY BitsChar Bits per Character Use Selections Remarks To select the number of data bits in a character 232 PORT and 422 PORT screens 7 or 8 Selectto match your computer The most common selection is 8 bits per character Blend_ Cascade Blend es EA Selection Remarks To apply a blending factor to the cascaded setpoint Numeric This parameter is only used if cascade control is selected see RemSPsrc and cascade blending is desired The formula used is Primary control loop output Ratio Primary control loop setpoint Blend_ Scale_ Second ary control loop setpoint CalcGain Calculated Gainn Use Selection Remarks To display the PID Gain calculated by auto tuning None These values are only displayed after auto tune is complete If the operator wishes to accept these values YES is entered in the Accept field of the auto tune screen CalcRate Calculated Rate Use Selection Remarks To display the PID Rate calculated by auto tuning None These values are only displayed after auto tune is comp
314. used to move the graphic selector box from field to field on CSZ Dimension II screen displays In its home inactive position the selector box is located between the screen title and time indicator on the top line of the screen If a window is displayed a second smaller box is displayed inside another box to the left of the selector box Fig 2 2 The following sequence explains how you can make selections and enter or change information on CSZ Dimension Il screen displays Macro Keys The two macro keys located below the display screen can be user defined to execute a string of commands e g to start and stop specific control actions Each key can be user labeled eg START and STOP and are displayed directly above each key on the bottom row of the screen see Fig 2 2 The label and function assigned to each macro key are displayed and available on all system screens Macro key functions are typically programmed into the CSZ Dimension II system by the control systems supervisor or administrator If you are not sure which functions have been programmed into the macro keys on your unit be sure to consult with your supervisor before attempting to use the keys See pg 4 14 to program the macro keys CSZ Dimension II User s MANUAL Memory Card Slot UNIVERSAL OPERATOR INTERFACE A slot is provided on the operator interface front panel for insertion of a credit card sized memory card The operator interface can
315. utines after which the terminal or host computer displays Dimension terminal mode v3 0 c 1993 Research Inc Note If there is no response on your terminal or host computer following step 9 it is possible that the settings given do not work with your application Try other baud rates and settings making sure that the settings on the Dimension II Communications Setup screen are also set on your terminal or computer Test the terminal mode by entering the following message at the terminal or computer keyboard PR TD press ENTER or RETURN Response 13 47 03 current time If an error number appears rather than a number as a response to the command refer to table B 5 in this appendix to identify the error that occurred Terminal Mode Data Access Once the terminal mode is established on Dimension II the system variable data access method can be used as described under SYSTEM VARIABLE DATA ACCESS in this appendix Network Mode Network mode DLC is a more advanced communication protocol intended for use with a host computer This mode defines the sequence and format for communication with Dimension II and consists of request and response mes sages which are framed by control characters These messages are transmitted as an entire block If equipped with a user developed software driver that understands the selected protocol the computer dictates when Dimension II transmits blocks of characters
316. utput changes gradually over a wide range of deviation values With a narrow PROPORTIONAL BAND high GAIN the controller output changes rapidly over a narrow range of deviation values See also GAIN PROPORTIONAL CONTROL AUTOMATIC CONTROL PROCESS CONTROLLER and PID E 13 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL GLOSSARY E 14 Proportional Control One of three types of automatic process control action Proportional control means that the output changes as the deviation setpoint minus the process variable changes Proportional control is only active over part of the process variable range The point at which it begins is determined by the gain setting This setting determines how fast the process will react to a given error signal See also GAIN PROPORTIONAL BAND PID RESET RATE and AUTO MATIC CONTROL Range The region of output or process variable movement between the minimum and maximum values Rate Derivative D One of three types of automatic process control action RATE control action adjusts the control signal according to the rate of change in the process vari able RATE action acts as a supplement to GAIN and RESET control i e RATE should not be used alone RATE action is especially beneficial for a process with slow response time since RATE action anticipates changes in the pro cess variable However RATE action also makes the process controller more sensitive to noise and short term
317. utputs HA Use Tagnames to display the state of contact outputs Selection LOGIC_2 screen None Remarks Tagnames are configured in the glossary Scale 7H Cascade Scale Factor Use To apply a scaling factor to a cascaded setpoint Selection Numeric Remarks This parameter is only used if cascade control is selected see RemSPsrc page 4 14 The formula used is Primary control loop setpoint Ratio 3545 Scale_ Secondary control loop setpoint The Blend_ parameter should be set to zero for cascade control Segment Program Segment Use To select the program segment to edit or review Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild 1 255 option to 749 Remarks None Seg Time Segment Time Use To set the time duration of the currently accessed segment Selections PROGRUN screen PgBuild HH MM SS Hours Minutes Seconds Remarks Segment time is selectable from one second to 99 hours SelcFunc Select Functions Use On the INPUTS screen to calibrate all types of inputs or to configure scaling and engineering units for linear inputs On the ANA_OUTS screen to calibrate analog outputs or configure the zero and span of analog outputs Selections ANA_OUTS screen or INPUTS screen Calibrat or Configur Remarks Opens window for calibration or configuration If selecting Calibrat see calibra tion section for instructions On the INPUTS screen selecting Configur will open a window which allows setting the limits for
318. utputs screen ANA OUTS appears See Figure 3 Turn the knob right once moving the cursor box to AnaOutpt and press the knob Turn the knob right or left until AN OUT 1 appears Pressthe knobto select analog output 1 Step 5 Step five will configure zero and span values for analog output one Turnthe knob right once moving cursor box to SelcFunc The Configure option will be shown Select it again by pressing the knob to highlight Press the knob again to select The Configure Outputs screen will Figure 3 Analog Outputs Screen appear See Figure 2 Zero and Span are the selections on this window The zero value is the minimum output value The span value is the maximum output value For our example we will use the following zero and span assignments for analog output 1 zero 0 00 span 75 00 Press the knob to select the zero value turn the knob to change value and press the knob again to enter new value Follow this procedure to assign a value to the span This arrangement will give full normal heating up to 75 percent output and will continue to give full normal heating up to 100 percent output Proportional heating will be applied below 75 percent output on loop 1 Turn the knob again to the right moving the cursor box to Close_Wn and press to enter Step 6 Step six will configure analog output two Turn the knob left moving cursor box to AnaOutpt Press the knob and turn right to change the selection to AN_OUT_2 and pr
319. valid setpoint depends on range in use This parameter is the setpoint loop 8 will have if loop 8 is configured to take its setpoint from the selected programmer A LET command for P8 P will be overridden if programmer P is in the Run mode See the description of the SPS Setpoint Source parameter for more informa tion on configuring a loop to take its setpoint from a given programmer PRINT request PR P8 1 PRINT response 98 60 LET request LE P8 3 100 7 LET response PDD Power Down Date Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the date on which the controller was last powered down PRINT format PR PDD Field length 8 Value MM DD YY Displayed in standard month day year format PRINT request PR PDD PRINT response 08 15 90 PDT Power Down Time TA088002 001 B 55 Dimension Il SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view the time at which the controller was last powered down PRINT format PR PDT Field length 8 Value HH MM SS Displayed in standard hours minutes seconds 24 hour time format PRINT request PR PDT PRINT response 04 19 22 PG Programmer Screen Titles Purpose Use Remarks Examples PID PID Group Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change the titles of Programmer Display screens STAG format STAG PG S where S is programmer screen number CTA
320. wer up Until you actually configure Dimension for your application you can practice using the front panel controls without actual field I O connections To get acquainted with your new controller turn to the quick reference materials on the other side of this sheet WINDOW SELECTOR BOX INDICATOR HOME POSITION GRAPHIC ICONS USER DEFINABLE CURRENT SELECTION DISPLAYED IN REVERSE VIDEO Quick Reference HELP Key Press this key to dis play on screen instructions during HELP KEY operation When the key is pressed a window appears on the currently displayed screen containing general operating instructions or specific instructions for operating the cur E rently selected parameter Press the UP DOWN HELP key a second time to close KEREN the window Diamond Key Press these integrated keys to move from icon to icon UP DOWN or from screen to quick BACKLIT screen LEFT RIGHT under each KEYS DISPLAY icon The currently active icon is SCREEN displayed in reverse video and the title of the currently displayed screen is shown on the top row of the screen Also note that the Alarm icon flashes when one or more alarms are active MEMORY CARD PORT MULTI FUNCTION KNOB Multi Function Knob TURN this knob to move the selector box to a specific field or through a list of selec 1 UNIT OPERATION tions on the currently displayed screen PRESS this knob to select or activate the item dis
321. where is analog input number X is input low alarm limit value Field length 8 Remarks Range is dependent on input range Examples PRINT request PR IL TA088002 001 B 43 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ILL Input Low Limit Purpose Use Remarks Examples PRINT response 12 5 LET request LE IL 1 14 2 LET response To view or change the input low limit for an analog input PRINT format PR ILL I where is analog input number LET format LE ILL I 7 X where is analog input number X is input low limit value Field length 8 The value range defaults to the range of the configured input type The setpoint and process variable will never exceed this limit PID calculations and other limits are affected when a change is made PRINT request PR ILL 1 PRINT response 12 2 LET request LE ILL 1 16 3 LET response ILT Input Alarm Latch Purpose Use Remarks Examples To view or change whether an alarm condition for a given input will be latched or unlatched when an alarm occurs Setting applies to both high and low alarms PRINT format PR ILT I where is input number LET format LE ILT I 7 X where is input number X is Latch or Unlatch Field length 8 Value Latch Unlatch Alarm condition latched Latch Alarm condition unlatched Unlatch PRINT request PR ILT 1 PRINT response Lotch LET request LE IL
322. work mode B 47 Dimension II SERIES 8700 User s MANUAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS Use PRINT format PR NA2 LET format LE NA2 X where X is network address number Field length 2 Value Network address 1 through 99 Remarks This address 1 99 must match on both the host computer and the controller Examples PRINT request PR NA2 PRINT response 0 1 LET request LE NA2 23 LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed NA4 RS 422 Network Address Diiziaca To xiour arc chaaao e network address of the controller for RS 422 communi cations in network mode Use PRINT format PR NA4 LET format LE NA4 X where X is network address number Field length 8 Value Network address 1 through 99 Remarks This address 1 99 must match on both the host computer and the controller Examples PRINT request PR NA4 PRINT response 22 LET request LE NA4 23 LET response Note Dimension II must be powered down and then powered up again if serial communications parameters are changed NAI Number of Analog Inputs Purnose To view the number Jof analog inputs used by the controller Use PRINT format PR NAI Field length 2 Remarks Dimension II accommodates up to six analog inputs per card with a maximum of three cards per controller Examples PRINT request PR NAI PRIN

Dimension II 50.04 User`s Manual - Environmental Test Chambers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents